US20040206621A1 - Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate - Google Patents
Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20040206621A1 US20040206621A1 US10/759,801 US75980104A US2004206621A1 US 20040206621 A1 US20040206621 A1 US 20040206621A1 US 75980104 A US75980104 A US 75980104A US 2004206621 A1 US2004206621 A1 US 2004206621A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- substrate
- tool
- etch
- low
- subsystem
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 963
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 142
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 94
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 51
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 36
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 26
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 398
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 371
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 claims description 226
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 claims description 51
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 568
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 286
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 234
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 164
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 140
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 100
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 84
- 238000009713 electroplating Methods 0.000 description 83
- 238000005137 deposition process Methods 0.000 description 67
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 58
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 57
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 57
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 45
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 43
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 39
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 33
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 30
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 29
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 29
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 27
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 27
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 26
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 25
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 24
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 17
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 16
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 15
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000004380 ashing Methods 0.000 description 13
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 11
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000004886 process control Methods 0.000 description 8
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 7
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 6
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- XPDWGBQVDMORPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluoroform Chemical compound FC(F)F XPDWGBQVDMORPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 5
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorane Chemical compound F KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 241000287219 Serinus canaria Species 0.000 description 4
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013400 design of experiment Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000006117 anti-reflective coating Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 3
- HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon carbide Chemical compound [Si+]#[C-] HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910010271 silicon carbide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002002 slurry Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 3
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000560 X-ray reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 2
- HMDDXIMCDZRSNE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [C].[Si] Chemical compound [C].[Si] HMDDXIMCDZRSNE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000149 argon plasma sintering Methods 0.000 description 2
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- OMZSGWSJDCOLKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) sulfide Chemical compound [S-2].[Cu+2] OMZSGWSJDCOLKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- -1 defect density Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007872 degassing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011066 ex-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005389 semiconductor device fabrication Methods 0.000 description 2
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100022717 Atypical chemokine receptor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper oxide Chemical compound [Cu]=O QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005751 Copper oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004278 EU approved seasoning Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101000678879 Homo sapiens Atypical chemokine receptor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910002091 carbon monoxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000356 contaminant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000431 copper oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000007812 deficiency Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032798 delamination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003623 enhancer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003628 erosive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011194 food seasoning agent Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005755 formation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005224 laser annealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- NJPPVKZQTLUDBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N novaluron Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C(OC(F)(F)C(OC(F)(F)F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)NC(=O)C1=C(F)C=CC=C1F NJPPVKZQTLUDBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920000620 organic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003376 silicon Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011800 void material Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67011—Apparatus for manufacture or treatment
- H01L21/67155—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations
- H01L21/67161—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations characterized by the layout of the process chambers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67011—Apparatus for manufacture or treatment
- H01L21/67155—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations
- H01L21/67161—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations characterized by the layout of the process chambers
- H01L21/67167—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations characterized by the layout of the process chambers surrounding a central transfer chamber
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67011—Apparatus for manufacture or treatment
- H01L21/67155—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations
- H01L21/67184—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations characterized by the presence of more than one transfer chamber
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67011—Apparatus for manufacture or treatment
- H01L21/67155—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations
- H01L21/67207—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations comprising a chamber adapted to a particular process
- H01L21/67225—Apparatus for manufacturing or treating in a plurality of work-stations comprising a chamber adapted to a particular process comprising at least one lithography chamber
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67242—Apparatus for monitoring, sorting or marking
- H01L21/67253—Process monitoring, e.g. flow or thickness monitoring
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67005—Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/67242—Apparatus for monitoring, sorting or marking
- H01L21/67276—Production flow monitoring, e.g. for increasing throughput
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L22/00—Testing or measuring during manufacture or treatment; Reliability measurements, i.e. testing of parts without further processing to modify the parts as such; Structural arrangements therefor
- H01L22/20—Sequence of activities consisting of a plurality of measurements, corrections, marking or sorting steps
Definitions
- the present invention relates to semiconductor device manufacturing, and more specifically to an integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate.
- a typical integrated circuit contains a plurality of metal pathways that provide electrical power for powering the various semiconductor devices forming the integrated circuit, and that allow these semiconductor devices to share/exchange electrical information.
- metal layers are stacked on top of one another by using intermetal or “interlayer” dielectrics that insulate the metal layers from each other.
- each metal layer must form electrical contact to at least one additional metal layer.
- Such metal-layer-to-metal-layer electrical contact is achieved by etching a hole (i.e., a via) in the interlayer dielectric that separates the metal layers, and by filling the resulting via with a metal to create an interconnect as described further below.
- Metal layers typically occupy etched pathways or “lines” in the interlayer dielectric.
- the copper metal layers and interconnect vias conventionally are encapsulated with a barrier material (e.g., to prevent copper atoms from creating leakage paths in silicon dioxide interlayers and/or defects in the silicon substrate on which the metal layers and interconnects are formed).
- a barrier material e.g., to prevent copper atoms from creating leakage paths in silicon dioxide interlayers and/or defects in the silicon substrate on which the metal layers and interconnects are formed.
- an increase in device performance is typically accompanied by a decrease in device area or an increase in device density.
- An increase in device density requires a decrease in the via and line dimensions used to form interconnects (e.g., a larger depth-to-width ratio or a larger “aspect ratio”). Decreased via and line dimensions require tighter control over the etching process used to form each via or line, the deposition process or processes used to fill each via or line and the planarization process employed thereafter.
- Another technique for improving device performance is to decrease the RC time constant associated with the metal layers employed by a semiconductor device. This may be performed, for example, by using low resistivity metal layers (e.g., copper metal layers rather than aluminum metal layers) and/or low k interlayer dielectrics (e.g., carbon doped oxide or silicon carbon interlayer dielectrics rather than silicon dioxide interlayer dielectrics). Interconnects which employ low K interlayer dielectrics are referred to herein as “low K dielectric interconnects”.
- a process window is an estimated range of one or more parameters that typically result for a given process (e.g., an estimated range of via or line depths and/or widths that typically result for a given etch process, an estimated range of film thicknesses that typically result for a given deposition process, etc.).
- vias and lines typically are overetched to ensure that all interlayer material to be removed is removed, vias and lines typically are overfilled to ensure that the deepest or widest vias and lines are adequately filled, and substrates typically are overpolished during planarization to ensure that planarization is complete.
- the use of process windows thereby reduces device uniformity (due to the inherent inaccuracy of using predicted/estimated via/line dimensions, deposited film thicknesses, etc.) and decreases throughput (due to overprocessing).
- test substrates may be periodically analyzed following each interconnect process step. For example, following an etch process, a test substrate may be analyzed within a stand alone metrology tool that measures via and/or line depth, width, profile, uniformity across a substrate or the like. Similarly, a stand alone metrology tool may be employed to measure deposited film thickness, and stand alone defect detection tools may be used to measure defect levels following etching, deposition and planarization.
- a stand alone metrology tool may be employed to measure deposited film thickness
- stand alone defect detection tools may be used to measure defect levels following etching, deposition and planarization.
- test substrates results in at least one major drawback. Namely, due to the time required to examine and analyze each test substrate following etching, deposition or planarization, such test wafers may only be employed periodically without significantly affecting the throughput of the various semiconductor processing tools used during interconnect formation (e.g., etching tools, deposition tools, planarization tools, etc.). Numerous substrates thereby may be processed using out of specification process windows before the out of specification process windows are identified with test substrates. High scrap costs result.
- APC APC has been (1) limited to only a few areas (e.g., chemical mechanical planarization (CMP), lithography, etc.); (2) limited to relatively simple applications (e.g., CMP, lithography, etc.); and (3) employed primarily at a process level (e.g., feedback for a single process), not at a system level (e.g., not at a level that affects numerous sequential processing steps such as those employed during interconnect formation).
- APC has not been used at a level that affects numerous processes and also that depends on the coordination of a number of discreet subsystems and technologies. Conventional APC techniques have had little, if any, affect on overall interconnect formation strategies; and the use of test substrates and process windows during interconnect formation remains widespread.
- a first system configured to pattern a substrate.
- the first system includes (1) a lithography subsystem configured to form a patterned masking layer on the substrate; and (2) an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after the patterned masking layer has been formed thereon and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and (3) a controller coupled to the lithography subsystem and the etch subsystem.
- the controller includes computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of (a) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and (b) adjusting a stepper focus of the lithography subsystem during formation of a subsequent patterned masking layer based at least in part on the information received from the etch subsystem.
- a second system configured to pattern a substrate.
- the second system includes (1) a low K dielectric deposition subsystem configured to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate, the low K dielectric deposition subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; (2) an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after one or more low K dielectric layers have been deposited on the substrate and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features in the one or more low K dielectric layers formed on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and (3) a controller coupled to the low K dielectric deposition subsystem and the etch subsystem.
- the controller includes computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of (1) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (2) determining an etch process to perform within the etch subsystem based at least in part on the information received from the inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (3) directing the etch subsystem to etch at least one low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the etch process; (4) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and (5) adjusting etching of the substrate in real-time based on the information received from the etch subsystem.
- Each computer program product described herein may be carried by a medium readable by a computer (e.g., a carrier wave signal, a floppy disc, a compact disc, a DVD, a hard drive, a random access memory, etc.).
- a medium readable by a computer e.g., a carrier wave signal, a floppy disc, a compact disc, a DVD, a hard drive, a random access memory, etc.
- a system for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate includes (1) means for receiving information about a substrate processed within a low K dielectric deposition subsystem from an integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (2) means for determining an etch process to perform within an etch subsystem based at least in part on the information received from the inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; and (3) means for directing the etch subsystem to etch at least one low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the etch process and based on real-time feedback information from the etch subsystem.
- FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of an inventive system for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 1B illustrates an alternative embodiment for the system of FIG. 1A wherein the module controller is “distributed” among the tools of the system;
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary embodiment of the module controller of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 3 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the low K dielectric deposition tool of FIG. 1A or 1 B;
- FIG. 4A is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the etch tool of FIG. 1A or 1 B;
- FIG. 4B is a top plan view of an exemplary etch and clean tool that may be employed within the inventive system of FIG. 1A or 1 B;
- FIG. 5 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool of FIGS. 1A and/or 1 B;
- FIG. 6 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the electroplating tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 7A is a top plan view of a first exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 7B is a top plan view of a second exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIGS. 8 A-P illustrate a flowchart of an exemplary process for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention
- FIGS. 9 A-L illustrate cross sectional views of a semiconductor substrate during the process of FIGS. 8 A-P;
- FIG. 10A is a table of exemplary process parameters of a low K dielectric deposition tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 10B( 1 ) and FIG. 10B( 2 ) are a table of exemplary process parameters of an etch tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 10C is a table of exemplary process parameters of a barrier/seed layer deposition tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 10D is a table of exemplary process parameters of an electroplating tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 10E is a table of exemplary process parameters of a planarization tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention
- FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a first exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention
- FIGS. 12 A-B are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a second exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 13 A-B are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a third exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 14 A-C are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a fourth exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a two level metal Cu/Low K interconnect formed in accordance with the present invention.
- the present invention provides integrated methods, apparatus, systems, data structures and computer program products for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate.
- the substrate may be a semiconductor substrate (e.g., a semiconductor wafer) or any other suitable substrate such as a glass plate for flat panel displays.
- a novel system includes a dielectric deposition subsystem and having an integrated inspection system, an etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system, a subsystem capable of depositing both a barrier layer and a seed layer (hereinafter a “barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem”) and having an integrated inspection system, an electroplating subsystem having an integrated inspection system, a planarization subsystem having an integrated inspection system and a module controller for controlling low K dielectric interconnect formation via these subsystems.
- a dielectric deposition subsystem and having an integrated inspection system
- an etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system
- a subsystem capable of depositing both a barrier layer and a seed layer hereinafter a “barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem”
- an electroplating subsystem having an integrated inspection system
- planarization subsystem having an integrated inspection system
- a module controller for controlling low K dielectric interconnect formation via these subsystems.
- Each integrated inspection system is capable of performing defect detection (e.g., to detect defect density on a surface of a substrate before and/or after a processing step) and/or metrology (e.g., to measure etch features, deposited layer thicknesses, surface planarity, etc., before and/or after a processing step).
- defect detection e.g., to detect defect density on a surface of a substrate before and/or after a processing step
- metrology e.g., to measure etch features, deposited layer thicknesses, surface planarity, etc., before and/or after a processing step.
- the substrate is delivered to the inventive system and is transferred to the low K dielectric deposition subsystem.
- the module controller may determine a low K dielectric deposition process (or processes) to perform within the low K dielectric deposition chamber.
- the module controller then directs the low K dielectric deposition subsystem to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate so as to form a low K interlayer dielectric.
- a low K interlayer dielectric e.g., thickness, defect density, etc., of one or more low K dielectrics that form the low K interlayer dielectric
- the module controller may determine a low K dielectric deposition process (or processes) to perform within the low K dielectric deposition chamber.
- the module controller then directs the low K dielectric deposition subsystem to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate so as to form a low K interlayer dielectric.
- an oxide layer, a carbon doped oxide layer and a silicon carbon layer may be deposited on the substrate within the low K dielectric deposition subsystem to form the low
- the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., to determine overall thickness of the low K interlayer dielectric and/or the thickness of the individual layers which form the low K interlayer dielectric, defect density, etc.) and inspection information is communicated to the module controller.
- the substrate then is transferred to a conventional lithography tool, and a masking layer is formed thereon and is patterned as is know in the art (e.g., to form a patterned masking layer).
- the substrate then is transferred to the etch subsystem.
- the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem may perform defect detect on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the substrate does not have too high of a defect density) and/or metrology on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the patterned masking layer has been properly formed/patterned as required to define interconnect regions or features in the low K interlayer dielectric following etching).
- the module controller may determine an etch process to perform within the etch subsystem.
- the etch process also may be determined based at least in part on other information such as information received from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem for a substrate previously etched within the etch subsystem (e.g., feedback information such as interconnect feature density/dimensions/profile, defect density, etc., following an etch process).
- the module controller then directs the etch subsystem to perform the determined etch process (e.g., so as to etch the desired via and/or line features within the low K interlayer dielectric of the substrate).
- the substrate is again inspected within the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem to determine interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile information, defect density, etc., and this information is communicated to the module controller.
- the above described lithography and etch steps may need to be performed multiple times (e.g., to form lines and vias in a dual damascene structure).
- One or more cleaning and/or annealing steps also may be employed.
- the substrate is transferred to the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., after a cleaning step and annealing step as described below).
- the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem may perform defect detection on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the substrate does not have too high of a defect density following cleaning and annealing) and/or metrology on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the interconnect features have been properly formed/patterned and/or to determine interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile if not previously determined by the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem).
- the module controller may determine a barrier layer deposition process and a seed layer deposition process to perform within the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem.
- the barrier and/or seed layer deposition processes also may be determined based at least in part on other information such as information received from the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem for a substrate previously processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., feedback information such as barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, defect density, etc., for a previously processed substrate).
- the module controller then directs the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem to perform the determined deposition process or processes (e.g., so as to deposit a barrier layer and a seed layer on the substrate).
- the substrate is inspected within the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem to determine deposited layer thicknesses (e.g., the thickness of the deposited barrier layer and/or of the deposited seed layer), defect density, etc., and this information is communicated to the module controller. Thereafter, the substrate is transferred to the electroplating subsystem and a fill layer is deposited on the substrate (e.g., so as to fill remaining portions of vias and trenches to form the conductive lines and plugs of the interconnect features).
- deposited layer thicknesses e.g., the thickness of the deposited barrier layer and/or of the deposited seed layer
- defect density e.g., the thickness of the deposited barrier layer and/or of the deposited seed layer
- the substrate is transferred to the electroplating subsystem and a fill layer is deposited on the substrate (e.g., so as to fill remaining portions of vias and trenches to form the conductive lines and plugs of the interconnect features).
- the module controller determines and directs the electroplating subsystem to employ an electroplating process.
- the electroplating process may be based at least in part on dimension and/or profile information regarding the interconnect features present on the substrate (previously measured for the substrate by the integrated inspection system of the etch or the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem).
- the electroplating process also may be based at least in part on information obtained from the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem for a substrate previously processed within the electroplating subsystem (e.g., information such as fill layer thickness, defect density, etc., for a previously processed substrate).
- the electroplating process also may be based at least in part on information gathered by the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem prior to processing.
- the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem (e.g., to determine fill layer thickness, defect density, etc.), and inspection information is communicated to the module controller.
- the substrate then is transferred to the planarization subsystem and is planarized.
- the module controller determines and directs the planarization subsystem to employ a planarization process that may be based at least in part on the thickness of the fill layer deposited on the substrate as obtained from the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem and/or that may be based at least in part on information obtained from the integrated inspection system of the planarization subsystem for a substrate previously processed therein (e.g., information such as defect density, surface planarity following planarization, etc.) or for the incoming substrate itself.
- the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the planarization subsystem (e.g., to determine defect density, surface planarity, etc.), and this inspection information is communicated to the module controller.
- the module “controller” may be a single, central controller that communicates with the integrated inspection system of each subsystem, or each subsystem may include controller capabilities (e.g., the module controller may be distributed among the subsystems such that each subsystem has a controller that communicates with one or more other subsystem controllers).
- each subsystem includes an embedded module controller and an automated process control module (e.g., computer program code) that may communicate with the integrated inspection system of the subsystem and with embedded module controllers of other subsystems, determine processes to perform within the subsystem based at least in part on feedback information (e.g., from the integrated inspection system of the subsystem) and/or feedforward information (e.g., from an embedded module controller of another subsystem), etc., as described in more detail below.
- feedback information e.g., from the integrated inspection system of the subsystem
- feedforward information e.g., from an embedded module controller of another subsystem
- each process performed may be based at least in part on feedforward information (e.g., patterned masking layer density, interconnect feature density/dimension/profile, defect density, deposited layer thickness, etc., for the substrate to be processed) and/or based at least in part on feedback information (e.g., defect density, interconnect feature dimensions/profile, deposited layer thickness, etc., for a substrate previously processed), the use of “estimated” process windows during low K dielectric interconnect formation may be reduced, and the accuracy and repeatability of each process step may be significantly increased.
- feedforward information e.g., patterned masking layer density, interconnect feature density/dimension/profile, defect density, deposited layer thickness, etc., for the substrate to be processed
- feedback information e.g., defect density, interconnect feature dimensions/profile, deposited layer thickness, etc., for a substrate previously processed
- each inspection system allows substrates to be inspected without significantly affecting subsystem throughput (e.g., every substrate processed may be inspected).
- One or more stand alone inspection systems may be used in addition to or in place of one or more of the integrated inspection systems.
- an integrated inspection system refers to an inspection system that is (1) coupled to a fabrication subsystem; and (2) capable of inspecting one substrate of a batch of substrates delivered to the fabrication subsystem during at least a portion of the time that another substrate of the batch of substrates is processed within the fabrication subsystem.
- a fabrication subsystem may include any known semiconductor device fabrication tool, system or subsystem such as an etch tool, a deposition tool, a cleaning tool, an oxidation tool, a planarization tool or the like.
- a stand alone inspection system refers to an inspection system that is (1) not coupled to a fabrication subsystem; and/or (2) incapable of inspecting one substrate of a batch of substrates delivered to the fabrication subsystem during at least a portion of the time that another substrate of the batch of substrates is processed within the fabrication subsystem.
- An inspection system refers to a system capable of performing defect detection or metrology.
- Defect detection refers to the detection, identification and/or classification of defects, contaminants, flaws, imperfections, deficiencies or the like.
- Metrology refers to the determination of one or more material or process parameters such as thickness, composition, index of refraction, atomic structure, mechanical properties, electrical properties, dimension, profile, gas pressure, process temperature, gas flow rates, pump rate or the like.
- Determining may include selecting, calculating, computing, defining, delineating, measuring or the like.
- Directing may include applying, initiating, controlling, managing, assisting or the like.
- Configured to or adapted to may include formed to, designed to, selected to, constructed to, manufactured to, programmed to or the like.
- Communication may include one or two way communication, polling, or the like.
- Feedback information refers to information regarding a substrate (e.g., defect density, material properties such as trench depth, trench width, trench profile, thickness, etc.) that is relevant to at least the processing of a subsequent substrate.
- Feedforward information refers to information regarding a substrate that is relevant to at least the subsequent processing of the same substrate.
- FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of an inventive system 100 for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention.
- the inventive system 100 includes a low K dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., low K dielectric deposition tool 102 ), a lithography tool 104 , an etch subsystem (e.g., etch tool 106 ), a cleaning tool 108 , an annealing furnace 110 , a barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 ), an electroplating subsystem (e.g., electroplating tool 114 ), and a planarization subsystem (e.g., planarization tool 116 ) each located at least partially within a clean room 118 .
- a low K dielectric deposition subsystem e.g., low K dielectric deposition tool 102
- a lithography tool 104 e.g., an etch subsystem (e.g.,
- Each tool 102 through 116 is in communication with a module controller 120 which is in turn in communication with a fabrication (FAB) host/controller (referred to as FAB controller 122 ), both described in more detail below.
- FAB controller 122 a fabrication host/controller
- One or more of the tools 102 - 116 also may be in communication with FAB controller 122 .
- More than one module or FAB controller also may be employed, as may additional/redundant processing tools (e.g., additional/redundant low K dielectric deposition tools, lithography tools, etch tools, cleaning tools, annealing furnaces, barrier/seed layer deposition tools, electroplating tools, and planarization tools).
- the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing low K dielectric materials on a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 .
- One exemplary embodiment of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 is described below with reference to FIG. 3.
- the lithography tool 104 may comprise any apparatus capable of forming a patterned masking layer used to define vias, lines or other interconnect features during low K dielectric interconnect formation on a substrate.
- the lithography tool 104 may include an FSI P2500 system manufactured by FSI International, Inc. for depositing an anti-reflection coating (such as a bottom anti-reflection coating (BARC) layer) and/or a photoresist layer, a DNS-80B system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for forming a uniform photoresist layer over the surface of a substrate, an ASML-5500/90 photoresist exposure system manufactured by ASM Lithography Inc.
- BARC bottom anti-reflection coating
- lithography tools for exposing a photoresist layer to a desired mask pattern, and a DNS system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for developing the exposed photoresist layer (thereby forming the desired patterned masking layer).
- lithography tools are well known in the art; and any other conventional lithography tool may be similarly employed.
- the etch tool 106 may comprise any apparatus capable of etching low K dielectric materials deposited within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 , and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates etched within the etch tool 106 . Exemplary embodiments of the etch tool 106 are described below with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B.
- the cleaning tool 108 may comprise any conventional apparatus for cleaning a substrate such as a wet chemical cleaning station that employs appropriate solvents and/or other chemicals, deionized (DI) water rinsing, Marangoni drying, megasonic techniques and/or any combination thereof to clean a single substrate or a batch of substrates.
- the cleaning tool 108 may comprise a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion. Any other conventional cleaning tool may be similarly employed.
- the annealing furnace 110 may comprise any conventional apparatus for annealing a substrate.
- the annealing furnace 110 may comprise a Canary furnace manufactured by Canary. Any other conventional annealing system may be similarly employed.
- the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing a barrier layer and a seed layer on a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 .
- One exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 is described below with reference to FIG. 5.
- the electroplating tool 114 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing a filler layer (e.g., copper or some other metal) within an innerconnect feature of a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the electroplating tool 114 .
- a filler layer e.g., copper or some other metal
- FIG. 6 One exemplary embodiment of the electroplating tool 114 is described below with reference to FIG. 6.
- the planarization tool 116 may comprise any apparatus capable of planarizing a substrate following deposition of a filler layer on the substrate via the electroplating tool 114 and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the planarization tool 116 . Exemplary embodiments of the planarization tool 116 are described below with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B.
- the clean room 118 may comprise any suitable clean room facility such as a class one clean room.
- the tools 102 - 116 need not be located within the same clean room.
- a planarization tool may be a significant contamination source (e.g., due to the nature of chemical mechanical polishing)
- Substrates may be transferred between the two clean rooms via any conventional mechanism (e.g., via a technician, a conveyor system, an automated guided vehicle, etc.).
- Such clean rooms may be of different classes.
- the FAB controller 122 may comprise any conventional fabrication controller, fabrication host, or manufacturing execution system (MES) capable of administering process flow among a plurality of processing tools (as is known in the art), but that is configured to communicate with the module controller 120 for receiving information therefrom (as described further below).
- the FAB controller 122 may monitor wafer lots or lot numbers, work in progress, equipment quality, module quality, perform wafer/lot dispatching and document management, etc., and may be implemented as hardware, software or a combination thereof.
- the module controller 120 is illustrated as a “central” controller that may communicate with at least the tools 102 , 106 and 112 - 116 (e.g., with the integrated inspection system of each tool) to receive feedforward and feedback information, to determine appropriate processes to perform within each tool based on the feedforward and/or feedback information, to direct each tool to perform a process, etc., as described below.
- FIG. 1B illustrates an alternative embodiment for the system 100 wherein the module controller 120 is “distributed” among the tools 102 , 106 and 112 - 116 .
- each of the tools 102 , 106 and 112 - 116 includes an embedded module controller (EMC) 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a , respectively, and an automated process control (APC) module 102 b , 106 b and 112 b - 116 b , respectively.
- EMC embedded module controller
- API automated process control
- the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a communicate with the module controller 120 to provide feedforward and/or feedback information to the module controller 120 , to receive processes from the module controller 120 , etc.
- the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a and the APC modules 102 b , 106 b and 112 b - 116 b are described further below.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary embodiment of the module controller 120 of FIGS. 1A and/or 1 B.
- the module controller 120 may be implemented as a system controller, as a dedicated hardware circuit, as an appropriately programmed general purpose computer, or as any other equivalent electronic, mechanical or electro-mechanical device.
- the module controller 120 comprises a processor 202 , such as one or more conventional microprocessors (e.g., one or more Intel® Pentium® processors).
- the processor 202 is in communication with a communication port 204 through which the processor 202 communicates with other devices (e.g., with tools 102 - 116 , with the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a , with the FAB controller 122 and/or with any other relevant device).
- the communication port 204 may include multiple communication channels for simultaneous communication with, for example, the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 , the etch tool 106 , the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 , the electroplating tool 114 , the planarization tool 116 , the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a , the FAB controller 122 and/or any other relevant device (e.g., the lithography tool 104 , the cleaning tool 108 , the annealing furnace 110 , etc.).
- the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 the etch tool 106 , the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 , the electroplating tool 114 , the planarization tool 116 , the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a , the FAB controller 122 and/or any other relevant device (e.g., the lithography tool 104 , the cleaning tool
- devices in communication with each other need only be “capable of” communicating with each other and need not be continually transmitting data to or receiving data from each other. On the contrary, such devices need only transmit data to or receive data from each other as necessary, and may actually refrain from exchanging data most the time. Further, devices may be in communication even though steps may be required to establish a communication link.
- the processor 202 also is in communication with a data storage device 206 .
- the data storage device 206 may comprise an appropriate combination of magnetic, optical and/or semiconductor memory, and may include, for example, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), a compact disk, a floppy disk, a DVD, a hard disk, or any other storage medium.
- RAM random access memory
- ROM read only memory
- the processor 202 and the data storage device 206 each may be, for example, located entirely within a single computer or other computing device, or connected to each other by a communication medium, such as a serial port cable, a telephone line or a radio frequency transceiver.
- the module controller 120 may comprise one or more computers that are connected to a remote server computer (not shown).
- the data storage device 206 may store, for example, (i) a program 208 (e.g., computer program code and/or a computer program product) adapted to direct the processor 202 in accordance with the present invention, and particularly in accordance with one or more of the processes described in detail below; and (ii) a database 210 adapted to store various information employed by the module controller 120 such as process recipes for one or more of the tools 102 - 116 , algorithms for controlling the operation of one or more of the tools 102 - 116 based on feedforward and/or feedback information as described further below, and/or any other relevant information (e.g. system status, processing conditions, process models, substrate history, metrology and/or defect data for each substrate, etc.).
- a database 210 may be hard coded in the program 208 .
- the program 208 may be stored in a compressed, an uncompiled and/or an encrypted format, and may include computer program code that allows the module controller 120 to:
- [0077] 1. determine a low K dielectric deposition process to perform on a substrate within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., based on information about a substrate previously processed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 );
- a barrier layer deposition process to perform on a substrate within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 (e.g., based on information about the substrate such as interconnect feature density, dimensions and/or profile, based on information about a substrate previously processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 , etc.);
- [0096] 20. determine a planarization process to perform on a substrate within the planarization tool 116 (e.g., based on information received from the inspection system of the electroplating tool 114 about a deposited fill layer, based on information obtained regarding a substrate previously processed within the planarization tool 116 , etc.);
- the module controller 120 may include any peripheral devices (e.g., keyboards, computer displays, pointing devices, etc., represented generally as input/output device 212 ) required to implement the above functionality.
- peripheral devices e.g., keyboards, computer displays, pointing devices, etc., represented generally as input/output device 212 .
- instructions of the program 208 may be read into a main memory (not shown) of the processor 202 from a computer readable medium other than the data storage device 206 such as from a ROM or from a RAM. While execution of sequences of instructions in the program 208 causes the processor 202 to perform the process steps described herein, hardwired circuitry may be used in place of, or in combination with, software instructions for implementation of the processes of the present invention. Thus, embodiments of the present invention are not limited to any specific combination of hardware and software.
- the EMC's 102 a , 106 a and 112 a - 116 a and/or the APC modules 102 b , 106 b and 112 b - 116 b may be configured similarly to the module controller 120 .
- FIG. 3 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 of FIG. 1A or 1 B.
- the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 comprises a processing tool 302 coupled to a factory interface 304 via loadlocks 306 a , 306 b .
- the processing tool 302 includes a transfer chamber 308 which houses a dual blade substrate handler 310 .
- the transfer chamber 308 is coupled to loadlocks 306 a , 306 b , a first set 312 of low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a , 314 b , a second set 316 of low K dielectric deposition chambers 318 a , 318 b and a third set 320 of anti-reflection coating deposition chambers 322 a , 322 b . Fewer or more low K dielectric deposition chambers and/or anti-reflection coating deposition chambers may be employed, and the module controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber.
- Loadlock chambers 306 a - b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the factory interface 304 to the transfer chamber 308 .
- the low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a - b , 318 a - b may comprise any conventional processing chambers capable of depositing low K dielectrics on a substrate.
- the anti-reflection coating deposition chambers 322 a - b if employed, may include any conventional processing chambers capable of deposition anti-reflection coatings on a substrate (e.g., for lithographic purposes).
- the processing tool 302 is a Producer® low K dielectric deposition tool (based on a ProducerTM platform) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other low K dielectric deposition system may be similarly employed.
- the factory interface 304 includes a buffer chamber 324 which houses a first substrate handler 326 a and a second substrate handler 326 b and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 328 a - b . It will be understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within the buffer chamber 324 , and that any number of loadports may be coupled to the buffer chamber 324 .
- the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 includes an integrated inspection system 330 .
- the integrated inspection system 330 includes one or more defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b and a metrology tool 334 coupled to and located within, respectively, the buffer chamber 324 of the factory interface 304 .
- the integrated inspection system 330 may include only one of the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b , or more defect detection tools and/or the metrology tools.
- One or more of the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b and the metrology tool 334 may be coupled to the processing tool 302 rather than to the factory interface 304 (e.g., by coupling the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b and/or the metrology tool 334 adjacent the loadlocks 306 a , 306 b ).
- the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b may comprise any conventional defect detection tools capable of detecting and/or characterizing defects on a surface of a substrate.
- the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b comprise the ExciteTM or IPMTM defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998 and titled “A PIXEL BASED MACHINE FOR PATTERNED WAFERS”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization and/or classification information.
- the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 106 a of the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 334 may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the thickness, thickness uniformity, refractive index, other film properties, or other relevant information for one or more low K dielectric layers.
- the metrology tool 334 comprises a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics. Other metrology tools also may be employed.
- the metrology tool 334 also may be configured to inspect a substrate after processing within any of the sets 312 , 316 and 320 of processing chambers (e.g., by performing metrology on each new layer formed within the processing tool 302 ), or after processing has been completed within all sets 312 , 316 and 320 of processing chambers (e.g., by performing metrology on the composite low K interlayer dielectric formed within the processing tool 302 ).
- two cassettes or “carriers” of substrates are delivered to the factory interface 304 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 .
- the substrate carriers are delivered to the loadports 328 a - b .
- Each loadport 328 a - b may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers.
- the substrate handler 310 of the processing tool 302 retrieves the substrate from the first loadlock 306 a and the substrate from the second loadlock 306 b and transfers the substrates to the (first) low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a , 314 b , respectively.
- a first low K dielectric layer e.g., silicon carbide with or without impurity doping
- the substrates are transferred (via the substrate handler 310 ) to the (second) low K dielectric deposition chambers 318 a , 318 b , respectively.
- a second low K dielectric layer e.g., carbon doped oxide
- the substrates are transferred (via the substrate handler 310 ) to the anti-reflective coating deposition chambers 322 a , 322 b , respectively (if employed).
- An anti-reflective coating e.g., silicon oxynitride
- first and second loadlocks 306 a , 306 b are transferred to first and second loadlocks 306 a , 306 b , respectively.
- the first substrate handler 326 a of the factory interface 304 retrieves the substrate from the first loadlock 306 a and transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 332 a and the metrology tool 334 .
- the second substrate handler 326 a of the factory interface 304 retrieves the substrate from the second loadlock 306 b and transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 332 b and the metrology tool 334 .
- the defect detection tool 332 a performs defect detection on the substrate it receives from the first loadlock 306 a (e.g., to determine the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identify or otherwise characterize defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the defect detection tool 332 b similarly performs defect detection on the substrate it receives from the second loadlock 306 b (e.g., to determine the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identify or otherwise characterize defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Each substrate is then inspected with the metrology tool 334 (e.g., after transfer from the defect detection tool 332 a , 332 b to the metrology tool 334 via the substrate handler 326 a , 326 b ). As stated, only one defect detection tool need be employed, and one substrate may be inspected by one of the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b at the same time the other substrate is inspected via the metrology tool 334 .
- the metrology tool 334 analyzes the substrate to determine such information as the thickness, thickness uniformity, refractive index, other film properties or other relevant information for one or more low K dielectric layers deposited within the processing tool 302 .
- the metrology tool 334 similarly may determine such information for any anti-reflection coating formed within the processing tool 302 .
- the metrology tool 334 provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the substrate handler 326 a or 326 b of the factory interface 304 retrieves each substrate inspected by the metrology tool 334 and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 328 a - b ).
- more than two substrates may be processed at a time within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 .
- up to four other substrates may be simultaneously processed within the second set 316 of low K dielectric deposition chambers 318 a , 318 b and the third set 320 of anti-reflection coating deposition chambers 322 a , 322 b .
- substrates may be processed within the chambers 314 a - 322 b while defect detection is performed within the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b or while metrology is performed within the metrology tool 334 on other substrates.
- defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 . Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (if desired).
- substrates may be inspected via the defect detection tools 332 a , 332 b and/or the metrology tool 334 before being processed within one of the chambers 314 a - 332 b.
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 102 a also may comprise such computer program code.
- FIG. 4A is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the etch tool 106 of FIGS. 1A or 1 B.
- the etch tool 106 comprises a processing tool 402 coupled to a factory interface 404 .
- the processing tool 402 includes a transfer chamber 406 which houses a first substrate handler 408 .
- the transfer chamber 406 is coupled to a first loadlock 410 a , a second loadlock 410 b , a first etch chamber 412 a , a second etch chamber 412 b , a third etch chamber 412 c , a fourth etch chamber 412 d , a first auxiliary processing chamber 414 a and a second auxiliary processing chamber 414 b . Fewer or more etch chambers or auxiliary processing chambers may be employed, and the module controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber.
- Loadlock chambers 410 a - b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the factory interface 404 to the transfer chamber 406 .
- the etch chambers 412 a - d may comprise any conventional processing chambers capable of etching low K dielectrics formed on a substrate (e.g., eMax chambers manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.).
- the auxiliary processing chambers 414 a - b if employed, may include, for example, cooldown chambers, substrate orientors, degas chambers, inspections chambers, ashing chambers or the like.
- the processing tool 402 is a Centura® Dielectric Etch and Strip tool (based on a CenturaTM platform) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other etching system may be similarly employed.
- the factory interface 404 includes a buffer chamber 416 which houses a second substrate handler 418 and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 420 a - d . It will be understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within the buffer chamber 416 , and that any number of loadports may be coupled to the buffer chamber 416 .
- the etch tool 106 includes an integrated inspection system 422 .
- the integrated inspection system 422 includes a defect detection tool 424 a and a metrology tool 424 b both coupled to the buffer chamber 416 of the factory interface 404 .
- the integrated inspection system 422 may include only one of the defect detection tool 424 a and the metrology tool 424 b , or may be coupled to the processing tool 402 rather than to the factory interface 404 (e.g., by coupling the defect detection tool 424 a and/or the metrology tool 424 b to the transfer chamber 406 such as at the location of one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 414 a - b ).
- the defect detection tool 424 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting and/or characterizing defects on a surface of a substrate.
- the defect detection tool 424 a comprises the ExciteTM or IPMTM defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998.
- the defect detection tool 424 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization and/or classification information.
- the defect detection tool 424 may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 106 a of the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 424 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring via and/or line depth, width, profile, and/or other critical dimension information.
- the metrology tool 424 b comprises a laser based metrology tool wherein laser light is scattered off of a substrate surface and analyzed to determine via/line depth, via/line profile, via/line width and/or other critical dimension information as is known in the art.
- the metrology tool 424 b also may be configured to inspect a substrate prior to etching so as to determine the density of a patterned masking layer used to define vias or lines formed in a low K dielectric material. The metrology tool 424 b can then provide information regarding the patterned masking layer to the module controller 120 , and based on this information the module controller 120 may determine an appropriate etch process (e.g., a “baseline” etch process selected from a plurality of etch processes stored by the module controller 120 ) for the substrate as described further below. In the embodiment of FIG. 1B, the EMC 106 a additionally or alternatively may perform such functions.
- an appropriate etch process e.g., a “baseline” etch process selected from a plurality of etch processes stored by the module controller 120
- the EMC 106 a additionally or alternatively may perform such functions.
- a cassette or carrier of substrates is delivered to the factory interface 404 of the etch tool 106 .
- the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 420 a - d .
- Each loadport 420 a - d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers.
- the substrate is then etched within the etch chamber (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and is transferred to the second loadlock 410 b .
- a patterned masking layer formed on the substrate e.g., a patterned photoresist layer
- An auxiliary ashing chamber similarly may be used to remove the patterned masking layer.
- the substrate Prior to etching within the etch chamber and/or after etching within the etch chamber the substrate may be processed within one or both of the auxiliary processing chambers 414 a - b (e.g., for substrate orientation purposes, for degassing, for cooldown, etc.).
- the substrate handler 418 of the factory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from the second loadlock 410 b and transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 424 a and the metrology tool 424 b . Assuming the substrate is first transferred to the defect detection tool 424 a , the defect detection tool 424 a performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 106 a in the system of FIG. 1B). The substrate handler 418 of the factory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from the defect detection tool 424 a and transfers the substrate to the metrology tool 424 b.
- defect detection e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.
- the metrology tool 424 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as via/line depth, via/line width, via/line profile and/or other critical dimension information. The metrology tool 424 b then provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 106 a in the system of FIG. 1B). The substrate handler 418 of the factory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from the metrology tool 424 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 420 a - d ).
- more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the etch tool 106 .
- up to three other substrates may be simultaneously processed within the etch chambers 412 b - d .
- substrates may be processed within the etch chambers 412 a - d while defect detection is performed within the defect detection tool 424 a or while metrology is performed within the metrology tool 424 b on a different substrate. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of the defect detection tool 424 a and the metrology tool 424 b , defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the etch tool 106 .
- Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the etch tool 106 (if desired). Further, substrates may be inspected via the defect detection tool 424 a and/or the metrology tool 424 b before being processed within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d.
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 106 a also may comprise such computer program code.
- the cleaning tool 108 may be part of an etch tool, and may share use of the integrated inspection system of the etch tool.
- FIG. 4B is a top plan view of an exemplary etch and clean tool 106 ′ that may be employed within the inventive system of FIG. 1A or 1 B.
- the etch and clean tool 106 ′ is similar to the etch tool 106 of FIG. 4A, but includes an additional buffer chamber 426 having a substrate handler 428 disposed therein, and two cleaning chambers 430 and 432 coupled to the buffer chamber 426 .
- Each cleaning chamber 430 , 432 may comprise any conventional apparatus for cleaning a substrate such as a wet chemical cleaning station that employs an appropriate solvent or other chemical, de-ionized (DI) water rinsing, Marangoni drying, megasonic techniques and/or any combination thereof to clean a substrate.
- DI de-ionized
- Such cleaning chambers are well known in the art and are not described in further detail herein.
- FIG. 5 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 of FIGS. 1A and/or 1 B.
- the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 comprises a processing tool 502 coupled to a factory interface 504 .
- the processing tool 502 includes a buffer chamber 506 a and a transfer chamber 506 b which house a first substrate handler 508 a and a second substrate handler 508 b , respectively.
- the buffer chamber 506 a is coupled to a first loadlock 510 a and a second loadlock 510 b .
- the transfer chamber 506 b is coupled to the buffer chamber 506 a , a pre-clean chamber 511 , a barrier layer deposition chamber 512 and a seed layer deposition chamber 514 .
- the buffer chamber 506 a also may be coupled to a first auxiliary processing chamber 516 a , a second auxiliary processing chamber 516 b and/or a third auxiliary processing chamber 516 c . Fewer or more barrier layer deposition chambers, seed layer deposition chambers, preclean chambers or auxiliary processing chambers may be employed, and the module controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber.
- Loadlock chambers 510 a - b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the factory interface 504 to the buffer chamber 506 a .
- the pre-clean chamber 511 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of cleaning an interconnect feature (e.g., to remove a metal oxide such as copper oxide from an underlying metal layer to be connected to with the interconnect) such as a conventional high density plasma (HDP) etch chamber.
- HDP high density plasma
- the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of depositing a barrier layer on a substrate such as a self-ionizing plasma (SIP) physical vapor deposition (PVD) chamber, any other suitable PVD chamber or the like.
- the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 is a Ta/TaN SIP PVD chamber.
- the seed layer deposition chamber 514 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of depositing a seed layer on a substrate such as an SIP PVD chamber, any other suitable PVD chamber or the like.
- the seed layer deposition chamber 514 is a copper SIP PVD chamber.
- the auxiliary processing chambers 516 a - c if employed, may include, for example, cooldown chambers, substrate orienters, degas chambers, inspections chambers or the like.
- the processing tool 502 is based on an EnduraTM platform manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other barrier/seed layer deposition system configuration may be similarly employed.
- the factory interface 504 includes a buffer chamber 518 which houses a third substrate handler 520 and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 522 a - d . It will understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within the buffer chamber 518 , and that any number of loadports may be coupled to the buffer chamber 518 .
- the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 502 includes an integrated inspection system 524 .
- the integrated inspection system 524 includes a defect detection tool 524 a and a metrology tool 524 b both coupled to the buffer chamber 518 of the factory interface 504 .
- the integrated inspection system 524 may include only one of the defect detection tool 524 a and the metrology tool 524 b , or may be coupled to the processing tool 502 rather than to the factory interface 504 (e.g., by coupling the defect detection tool 524 a and/or the metrology tool 524 b to the buffer chamber 506 a such as at the location of one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 516 a - c ).
- the defect detection tool 524 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate.
- the defect detection tool 524 a comprises the ExciteTM or integrated particle monitor (IPMTM) defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998 and titled “A PIXEL BASED MACHINE FOR PATTERNED WAFERS”.
- the defect detection tool 524 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information.
- the defect detection tool 524 a may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 524 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring barrier layer and/or seed layer thickness or other relevant barrier and/or seed layer information.
- Exemplary metrology tools include x-ray, thermal, sonic, laser, optical interference, light scattering or eddy-current based metrology tools, four point probes, etc.
- the metrology tool 524 b also may measure the dimensions of interconnect features present on a substrate (e.g., line or via depth, width, profile, and/or other critical dimension information).
- the metrology tool 524 b comprises an x-ray reflectometry system that examines the x-ray interference pattern produced by a film to determine film thickness, density, roughness, etc.
- the metrology system 524 b may include a laser based metrology tool wherein laser light is scattered off of a substrate surface and analyzed to determine interconnect feature density, depth, profile, width and/or other critical dimension information as is known in the art.
- the metrology tool 524 b can provide information regarding interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile to the module controller 120 , and based on this information the module controller 120 may determine an appropriate barrier layer and/or seed layer process for a substrate as described further below.
- the EMC 112 a additionally or alternatively may perform such functions.
- a cassette or carrier of substrates is delivered to the factory interface 504 of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 .
- the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 522 a - d .
- Each loadport 522 a - d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers.
- the substrate handler 508 a of the processing tool 502 retrieves the substrate from the first loadlock 510 a and transfers the substrate to a degas chamber (e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a - c ) where the substrate is degassed. After the substrate is degassed, the substrate handler 508 a transfers the substrate to a first pass-through 526 of the processing tool 502 .
- a degas chamber e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a - c
- the substrate handler 508 b of the processing tool 502 retrieves the substrate from the first pass-through 526 and transfers the substrate to the preclean chamber 511 where the substrate is precleaned (e.g., to remove metal oxide from a base of each interconnect feature formed on the substrate) as is known in the art. The substrate then is transferred to the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 .
- a barrier layer is deposited on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and the substrate is transferred to the seed layer deposition chamber 514 .
- a seed layer is similarly deposited on the substrate.
- the substrate is transferred to a second pass-through 528 of the processing tool 502 by the substrate handler 508 b and the substrate handler 508 a then transfers the substrate to the loadlock 510 b .
- the substrate may be processed within one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 516 a - c (e.g., for substrate orientation purposes, for degassing, for cooldown, etc.).
- the substrate handler 520 of the factory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from the second loadlock 510 b and transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 524 a and the metrology tool 524 b . Assuming the substrate is first transferred to the defect detection tool 524 a , the defect detection tool 524 a performs defect detection on the substrate (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Following defect detection, the substrate handler 520 of the factory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from the defect detection tool 524 a and transfers the substrate to the metrology tool 524 b.
- defect detection tool 524 a performs defect detection on the substrate (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface
- the metrology tool 524 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, and/or other critical dimension information. The metrology tool 524 b then provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thereafter, the substrate handler 520 of the factory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from the metrology tool 524 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 522 a - d ).
- more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 .
- substrates may be processed within the chambers 511 - 514 while defect detection is performed within the defect detection tool 524 a or while metrology is performed within the metrology tool 524 b on a different substrate.
- defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 (if desired).
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 112 a also may comprise such computer program code.
- the defect detection tool 524 a and the metrology tool 524 b may perform defect detection and metrology, respectively, on a deposited barrier layer before a seed layer is formed over the barrier layer.
- the metrology tool 524 a also may be employed to measure the dimensions of interconnect features of a substrate (e.g., via and/or line width, depth, profile, etc.) prior to barrier layer deposition, and to communicate such dimension information to the module controller 120 and/or to the EMC 112 a . This information then may be used to determine a barrier layer deposition process and/or a seed layer deposition process to perform within the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 and/or the seed layer deposition chamber 514 , respectively, as described further below. Interconnect feature density may be similarly determined and employed.
- the tool 112 employs the EMC 112 a and the APC module 112 b (FIG. 1B)
- all or part of the information obtained from the integrated inspection system 524 may be communicated to the EMC 112 a of the tool 112 .
- the EMC 112 a and the APC module 112 b may at least partially control the processes performed within the chambers 512 , 514 based on information from the integrated inspection system 524 (as described below).
- FIG. 6 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the electroplating tool 114 of the inventive system 100 of FIGS. 1A and 1B.
- the electroplating tool 114 comprises a processing tool 602 coupled to a factory interface 604 .
- the processing tool 602 includes a chamber 606 which houses a first substrate handler 608 .
- the first substrate handler 608 has two individually controllable robot arms 610 a , 610 b .
- the chamber 606 also includes a first electroplating chamber 612 a , a second electroplating chamber 612 b , a third electroplating chamber 612 c , and a fourth electroplating chamber 612 d .
- the chamber 606 further includes an integrated bevel cleaner 614 and a spin rinse dryer 616 (in a stacked configuration, although other configurations may be employed).
- the electroplating chambers 612 a - d may comprise any conventional electroplating chambers capable of depositing a fill layer on the substrate (e.g., a metal layer such as copper or aluminum that “fills” interconnect features such as vias or lines etched within an interlayer dielectric).
- each electroplating chamber 612 a - d is capable of depositing a copper fill layer on a substrate via the interaction of a copper sulfide base solution with a sulfuric acid (H 2 SO 4 ) solution as is known in the art.
- the integrated bevel cleaner 614 may comprise any conventional tool for removing deposited layers from an edge of a substrate.
- the integrated bevel cleaner 614 directs an etchant solution (e.g., H 2 SO 4 and hydrogen peroxide) toward a beveled edge of a substrate to remove metal layers therefrom.
- an etchant solution e.g., H 2 SO 4 and hydrogen peroxide
- the spin rinse dryer 616 may comprise any conventional spin rinse dryer capable of cleaning, rinsing and/or drying a substrate following edge cleaning.
- the processing tool 602 may be based on any equipment platform.
- the processing tool 602 may be an ElectraTM integrated electrochemical process (IECPTM) system manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Suitable electroplating chambers/systems are also described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,113,771 and 6,258,220 which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Other systems/platforms may be employed.
- IECPTM ElectraTM integrated electrochemical process
- the factory interface 604 includes a buffer chamber 618 which houses a second substrate handler 620 , a third substrate handler 622 and an orienter 624 , and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 626 a - b . It will understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within the buffer chamber 618 , and that any number of loadports may be coupled to the buffer chamber 618 .
- a first anneal chamber 627 a and a second anneal chamber 627 b also are coupled to the buffer chamber 618 .
- the electroplating tool 114 includes a first integrated inspection system 628 and a second integrated inspection system 630 .
- the first integrated inspection system 628 includes a defect detection tool 628 a and a metrology tool 628 b both coupled to the first anneal chamber 627 a .
- the second integrated inspection system 630 includes a defect detection tool 630 a and a metrology tool 630 b both coupled to the second anneal chamber 627 b .
- each integrated inspection system may include only one of a defect detection tool and a metrology tool, or may be coupled to the processing tool 602 rather than to the factory interface 604 .
- Each defect detection tool 628 a , 630 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate.
- each defect detection tool 628 a , 630 a comprises the ExciteTM or IPMTM defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998.
- Each defect detection tool 628 , 630 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information.
- Each defect detection tool 628 a , 630 may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tools 628 b , 630 b may comprise any conventional metrology tools capable of measuring the thickness of a deposited fill layer (e.g., an electroplated metal layer) such as x-ray, thermal, sonic, laser, optical interference, light scattering or eddy-current based metrology subsystems, four point probes, etc.
- each metrology tool 628 b , 630 b comprises an x-ray reflectometry system that examines the x-ray interference pattern produced by a film to determine film thickness, density, roughness, etc.
- One such system is the METAPROBEX reflectometer manufactured by Thermawave, Inc., although other systems may be employed.
- the defect detection tools 628 a , 630 a and/or the metrology tools 628 b , 630 b may share chambers with the anneal chambers 627 a , 627 b or may use separate chambers.
- a substrate carrier is delivered to the factory interface 604 of the electroplating tool 114 .
- the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 626 a - b .
- Each loadport 626 a - b may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers.
- one of the substrate handlers 620 , 622 retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to the orienter 624 .
- the orienter 624 orients the substrate (e.g., by locating a flat or notch on the substrate as is known in the art).
- the substrate handler 608 of the processing tool 602 retrieves the substrate from the orienter 624 and transfers the substrate to one of the electroplating chambers 612 a - d .
- a metal fill layer then is deposited on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and the substrate is transferred to the integrated bevel cleaner 614 (by one of the robot arms 610 a , 610 b of the substrate handler 608 ).
- the integrated bevel cleaner 614 cleans the edge (bevel) of the substrate (e.g., via an etchant). Following edge cleaning, the substrate is transferred to the spin rinse dryer 616 wherein the substrate is (1) cleaned (e.g., to remove residue from the edge cleaning process); (2) rinsed; and/or (3) dried.
- the substrate is transferred to one of the anneal chambers 627 a , 627 b of the factory interface 604 (e.g., via one of the substrate handlers 620 , 622 ). Assuming the substrate is transferred to the first anneal chamber 627 a , the substrate is annealed within the first anneal chamber 627 a . In at least one embodiment, the substrate is annealed in forming gas, nitrogen or argon at 250° C. for about 30 seconds, and the substrate then is rapidly cooled (e.g., within about 30 seconds). Such annealing stabilizes copper grain structure and copper resistivity. Other annealing processes also may be employed such as laser annealing, pedestal annealing, high pressure annealing or the like.
- defection detection and/or metrology are performed on the substrate (e.g., via the defect detection tool 628 a and the metrology tool 628 b ), in any order.
- the defect detection tool 628 a may perform defect detection on the substrate (e.g., to determine the defect density of the surface of the electroplated fill layer, to identify or otherwise characterize or classify defects on the surface of the electroplated fill layer, etc.) and may communicate information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 628 b may analyze the substrate to determine such information as electroplated fill layer thickness and may provide this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the substrate handler 620 then retrieves the substrate from the anneal chamber 627 a and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 626 a - b ).
- more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the electroplating tool 114 .
- substrates may be processed within the chambers 612 a - d while defect detection is performed by the defect detection tools 628 a , 630 a , while metrology is performed by the metrology tools 628 b , 630 b , or while anneal processes are performed on different substrates (within the anneal chambers 627 a , 627 b ).
- defect detection and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the electroplating tool 114 . Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the electroplating tool 114 (if desired).
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 114 a also may comprise such computer program code.
- FIG. 7A is a top plan view of a first exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool 116 of FIGS. 1A and 1B.
- the planarization tool 116 may comprise any tool or apparatus capable of planarizing a substrate as is known in the art and configured in accordance with the present invention as described below.
- the planarization tool 116 includes a processing tool 702 coupled to a factory interface 704 .
- the processing tool 702 comprises a Mirra MesaTM planarization tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. (e.g., a 200 mm substrate planarization tool) and described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/547,189, filed Apr. 11, 2000 and titled “METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATES USING AN INPUT MODULE”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. It will be understood that any other planarization apparatus may be similarly employed.
- the processing tool 702 includes a robot 706 that is movable along a track 708 , an input shuttle 710 , a polishing system 712 and a cleaning system 714 .
- the polishing system 712 includes a load cup 716 , a first polishing platen 718 a (e.g., a bulk polishing platen), a second polishing platen 718 b (e.g., an endpoint on barrier layer polishing platen) and a third polishing platen 718 c (e.g., a barrier layer buff polishing platen).
- the cleaning system 714 includes an input module 720 a , a megasonic module 720 b , a first scrubber module 720 c , a second scrubber module 720 d , a spin rinse dryer module 720 e and an output module 720 f.
- Factory interface 704 includes a buffer chamber 722 , a substrate handler 724 located within the buffer chamber 722 and a plurality of loadports 726 a - d coupled to the buffer chamber 722 .
- An integrated inspection system 728 also is coupled to the buffer chamber 722 as shown. In general, any number of substrate handlers and/or loadports may be employed within the factory interface 704 .
- the integrated inspection system 728 includes a defect detection tool 730 a and a metrology tool 730 b both coupled to the buffer chamber 722 of the factory interface 704 .
- the integrated inspection system 728 may include only one of the defect detection tool 730 a and the metrology tool 730 b.
- the defect detection tool 730 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate.
- the defect detection tool 730 a comprises the ExciteTM or IPMTM defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998.
- the defect detection tool 730 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information.
- the defect detection tool 730 a may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 730 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the planarity of a planarized substrate.
- the metrology tool 730 b may comprise a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics, or a Novascan 840, 2200 or 3000 measurement tool manufactured by Nova Measuring Instruments; or an eddy-current based thickness measurement tool such as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/574,008, filed May 19, 2000 and titled “EDDY CURRENT SENSING OF METAL REMOVAL FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No. 09/900,664, filed Jul.
- a substrate carrier is delivered to the factory interface 704 of the planarization tool 116 .
- the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 726 a - d .
- Each loadport 726 a - d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers.
- the substrate is then polished within the polishing system 712 (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below employing one or more of the polishing platens 718 a - c ) and is transferred to the input module 720 a of the cleaning system 714 via the input shuttle 710 .
- the substrate is cleaned in the megasonic module 720 b , scrubbed within one or both of the scrubber modules 720 c - d and dried in the spin rinse dryer module 720 e .
- the substrate then is transferred to the output module 720 f and from the output module 720 f to the substrate handler 724 (via the robot 706 ).
- the substrate handler 724 transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 730 a and the metrology tool 730 b . Assuming the substrate is first transferred to the defect detection tool 730 a , the defect detection tool 730 a performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). The substrate handler 724 retrieves the substrate from the defect detection tool 730 a and transfers the substrate to the metrology tool 730 b.
- defect detection e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.
- the metrology tool 730 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as surface planarity and provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the substrate handler 724 retrieves the substrate from the metrology tool 730 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 726 a - d ).
- more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the planarization tool 116 .
- other substrates may be simultaneously processed within the polishing system 712 (e.g., on other platens) and/or cleaned within the cleaning system 714 .
- substrates may be processed within the polishing system 712 and/or the cleaning system 714 while defect detection is performed within the defect detection tool 730 a or while metrology is performed within the metrology tool 730 b on a different substrate.
- defect detection and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the planarization tool 116 . Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the planarization tool 116 (if desired).
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 116 a also may comprise such computer program code.
- FIG. 7B is a top plan view of a second exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool 116 of FIGS. 1A and 1B (referred to as planarization tool 116 ′ for convenience).
- the planarization tool 116 ′ of FIG. 7B is similar to the planarization tool 116 of FIG. 7A, and includes a processing tool 702 ′ coupled to a factory interface 704 ′.
- the processing tool 702 ′ comprises a ReflexionTM planarization tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. (e.g., a 300 mm substrate planarization tool) and described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/244,456, filed Feb. 4, 1999 and titled “APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING WITH AN ADVANCEABLE POLISHING SHEET”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the processing tool 702 ′ includes a substrate handler 706 ′ (e.g., a “wet” robot), an input shuttle 710 ′, a polishing system 712 ′ and a cleaning system 714 ′.
- the polishing system 712 ′ includes a load cup 716 ′, a first polishing platen 718 a ′ (e.g., a bulk polishing platen), a second polishing platen 718 b ′ (e.g., an endpoint on barrier layer polishing platen) and a third polishing platen 718 c ′ (e.g., a barrier layer buff polishing platen).
- the cleaning system 714 ′ includes an input module 720 a ′, a megasonic module 720 b ′, a first scrubber module 720 c ′, a second scrubber module 720 d ′, a spin rinse dryer module 720 e ′ and an output module 720 f′.
- Factory interface 704 ′ includes a buffer chamber 722 ′, a substrate handler 724 ′ located within the buffer chamber 722 ′ and a plurality of loadports 726 a ′- b ′ coupled to the buffer chamber 722 ′.
- An integrated inspection system 728 ′ also is coupled to the buffer chamber 722 ′ as shown. In general, any number of substrate handlers and/or loadports may be employed within the factory interface 704 ′.
- the integrated inspection system 728 ′ includes a defect detection tool 730 a ′ and a metrology tool 730 b ′ both coupled to the buffer chamber 722 ′ of the factory interface 704 ′.
- the integrated inspection system 728 ′ may include only one of the defect detection tool 730 a ′ and the metrology tool 730 b′.
- the defect detection tool 730 a ′ may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate.
- the defect detection tool 730 a ′ comprises the ExciteTM or IPMTM defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998.
- the defect detection tool 730 a ′ may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information.
- the defect detection tool 730 a ′ may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the metrology tool 730 b ′ may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the planarity of a planarized substrate.
- the metrology tool 730 b ′ may comprise a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics, or a Novascan 840, 2200 or 3000 measurement tool manufactured by Nova Measuring Instruments; or an eddy-current based thickness measurement tool such as described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Serial No. 09/574,008, filed May 19, 2000 and titled “EDDY CURRENT SENSING OF METAL REMOVAL FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No.
- a substrate carrier is delivered to the factory interface 704 ′ of the planarization tool 116 ′.
- the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 726 a ′- b ′.
- the substrate handler 724 ′ retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to the input shuttle 710 ′.
- the substrate handler 706 ′ transfers the substrate from the input shuttle 710 ′ to the load cup 716 ′ of the polishing system 712 ′.
- the substrate is then polished within the polishing system 712 ′ (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below employing one or more of the polishing platens 718 a ′- c ′) and is transferred to the input module 720 a ′ of the cleaning system 714 ′ via the substrate handler 706 ′ and the input shuttle 710 ′.
- the substrate is cleaned in the megasonic module 720 b ′, scrubbed within one or both of the scrubber modules 720 c ′- d ′ and dried in the spin rinse dryer module 720 e ′.
- the substrate then is transferred to the output module 720 f ′ and from the output module 720 f ′ to the substrate handler 724 ′ (via the robot 706 ′).
- the substrate handler 724 ′ transfers the substrate to one of the defect detection tool 730 a ′ and the metrology tool 730 b ′. Assuming the substrate is first transferred to the defect detection tool 730 a ′, the defect detection tool 730 a ′ performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes/classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). The substrate handler 724 ′ retrieves the substrate from the defect detection tool 730 a ′ and transfers the substrate to the metrology tool 730 b′.
- defect detection e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes/classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.
- the metrology tool 730 b ′ analyzes the substrate to determine such information as surface planarity and provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to the EMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B).
- the substrate handler 724 ′ retrieves the substrate from the metrology tool 730 b ′ and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 726 a ′- b ′).
- more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the planarization tool 116 ′.
- the polishing system 712 ′ e.g., on one platen
- other substrates may be simultaneously processed within the polishing system 712 ′ (e.g., on other platens) and/or cleaned within the cleaning system 714 ′.
- substrates may be processed within the polishing system 712 ′ and/or the cleaning system 714 ′ while defect detection is performed within the defect detection tool 730 a ′ or while metrology is performed within the metrology tool 730 b ′ on a different substrate.
- defect detection tool 730 a ′ and the metrology tool 730 b ′ defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the planarization tool 116 ′; and defect detection and/or metrology may be performed on every substrate processed within the planarization tool 116 ′ (if desired).
- Either the module controller 120 or the FAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above.
- the EMC 116 a also may comprise such program code.
- FIGS. 8 A-P illustrate a flowchart of an exemplary process 800 for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention.
- the exemplary process 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A-7B, and FIGS. 9 A-L which illustrate cross sectional views of a semiconductor substrate during the process 800 of FIGS. 8 A-P.
- the process 800 is described with reference to the module controller 120 (without use of the EMC's 102 a - 116 a and the APC modules 102 b - 116 b ).
- process 800 may be similarly performed using one or more of the EMC's 102 a - 116 a and the APC modules 102 b - 116 b alone or in combination with the module controller 120 .
- the process 800 begins with step 801 .
- the inventive system 100 receives a substrate cassette (e.g., via a delivery mechanism such as an overhead conveyor system, an automated guided vehicle, etc.) and loads the substrate cassette into the factory interface 304 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 .
- the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 328 a - b of the factory interface 304 .
- process flow within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 will be described only with regard to a single substrate cassette in which substrates are processed employing loadport 328 a , substrate handler 326 a , loadlock 306 a , chambers 314 a , 318 a and 322 a , defect detection tool 332 a and metrology tool 334 .
- substrates may be simultaneously processed therewith employing loadport 328 b , substrate handler 326 b , loadlock 306 b , chambers 314 a , 318 b and 322 b , defect detection tool 332 b and metrology tool 334 .
- a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette (at loadport 328 a ) by the substrate handler 326 a and in step 804 , the substrate is transferred to the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a (e.g., via the substrate handler 326 a , the loadlock 306 a and the substrate handler 310 ).
- the module controller 120 determines a first low K dielectric deposition process to perform on the substrate (step 805 ).
- the first low K dielectric deposition process may be based on, for example, information obtained from the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 for a low K dielectric layer previously deposited within the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a or 314 b (e.g., information such as deposited dielectric layer thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, index of refraction, other film properties, etc., for a given deposition process, defect density or the like).
- This type of information constitutes one example of feedback information.
- the first low K dielectric deposition process may be determined based on any other information, and may be determined at any time (e.g., before step 805 ).
- the module controller 120 may determine a low K dielectric deposition process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner.
- the module controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206 ) a library of low K dielectric deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular low K dielectric interconnect feature density, interconnect feature dimension, interconnect feature profile, etc. Based on information about interconnect features to be formed and/or based on feedback information regarding one or more low K dielectric layers previously deposited within the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a or 314 b , the module controller 120 may determine a low K dielectric deposition process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored low K dielectric deposition processes.
- the module controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected low K dielectric deposition process to better match the low K dielectric interconnect that is to be formed.
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a low K dielectric deposition process include chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, gas flow rates, deposition time, etc., which may affect one or more of thickness, dielectric constant, stress level, refractive index, defect density and uniformity of the deposited low K dielectric layer.
- the module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on to be formed interconnect feature density, dimensions, profile, or other similar information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a low K dielectric layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic).
- FIG. 10A illustrates exemplary process parameters of a low K dielectric deposition process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a low K dielectric deposition process. Once a low K dielectric deposition process has been determined, in step 806 , the module controller 120 directs the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a to deposit a first low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the process.
- FIG. 9A illustrates an exemplary silicon substrate 902 having a first dual damascene or “T2” low K dielectric layer 904 formed over a single damascene or “T1” structure 906 .
- the single damascene structure 906 may be formed within the inventive system 100 via a process similar to process 800 .
- the single damascene structure 906 includes an oxide layer 908 formed on the silicon substrate 902 , a first T1 low K dielectric layer 910 formed on the oxide layer 908 , a second T1 low K dielectric layer 912 formed on the first T1 low K dielectric 910 and copper lines 914 a - d formed within the second T1 low K dielectric layer 912 .
- Each copper line 914 a - d includes a barrier layer 916 a - d which surrounds a copper plug 918 a - d as shown.
- Each copper line 914 a - d may include a copper seed layer (not separately shown in FIG. 9A).
- the oxide layer 908 may be, for example, formed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., by employing one or more oxide deposition chambers within the processing tool 302 of FIG. 3), as may be the first and second T1 low K dielectric layers 910 , 912 .
- the oxide layer 908 comprises approximately 10,000 angstroms of undoped silicon oxide deposited by conventional methods.
- the oxide layer 908 may have, for example, a wafer-to-wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a within wafer uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 micron or larger particles per 200 mm wafer, and a refractive index of about 1.46.
- the first T1 low K dielectric layer 910 may comprise, for example, approximately 500 angstroms of a chemical vapor deposited (CVD) silicon carbide (e.g., BlokTM). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C.
- CVD chemical vapor deposited
- BlokTM silicon carbide
- a pressure of about 8.7 Torr for a time of less than about 1 minute may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 4.8, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 micron or larger particles per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about ⁇ 2.5 ⁇ 10 9 dyne/cm 2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.95 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers).
- the second T1 low K dielectric layer 912 may comprise, for example, approximately 6500 angstroms of a CVD carbon doped oxide (e.g., Black DiamondTM (BD)). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C.
- BD Black DiamondTM
- the barrier layers 916 a - d , the copper seed layers (not shown), and the copper plugs 918 a - d may be formed similarly to those described below with reference to the process 800 .
- Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters.
- the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 comprises approximately 700 angstroms of a CVD silicon carbide (e.g., BlokTM). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C.
- a CVD silicon carbide e.g., BlokTM
- a pressure of about 8.7 Torr for a time of less than about 1 minute may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 4.8, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 microns per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about ⁇ 2.5 ⁇ 10 9 dyne/cm 2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.95 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers).
- Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters.
- step 807 following deposition of the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 the substrate is transferred from the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a to the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a , and in step 808 the module controller 120 determines a second low K dielectric deposition process to perform on the substrate.
- the second low K dielectric deposition process may be based on, for example, information obtained from the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 for a low K dielectric layer previously deposited within the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a or 318 b (e.g., information such as deposited dielectric layer thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, index of refraction, other film properties, etc., for a given deposition process, defect density or the like). It will be understood that the second low K dielectric deposition process may be determined based on any other information, and may be determined at any time (e.g., before step 808 ).
- the module controller 120 may store a library of second low K dielectric deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular interconnect feature density, interconnect dimension, interconnect profile, etc. Based on information about the interconnect features which are to be formed on the substrate and/or based on the first low K dielectric layer deposited on the substrate within the first low K dielectric deposition chamber 314 a or 314 b , the module controller 120 may determine a second low K dielectric layer deposition process and/or vary process parameters accordingly.
- one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a second low K dielectric layer previously deposited on a substrate within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., if the previously deposited low K dielectric layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, etc.).
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a low K dielectric deposition process include chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, gas flow rates, deposition time, etc., which may affect one or more of thickness, dielectric constant, stress level, refractive index, defect density and uniformity of the deposited low K dielectric layer.
- the above process parameters are summarized in FIG. 10A and may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a low K dielectric deposition process to perform.
- step 809 the module controller 120 directs the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a to deposit a second low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the process.
- FIG. 9B illustrates the substrate 902 having a second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 formed over the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 within the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a .
- the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 comprises approximately 11000 angstroms of a CVD carbon doped oxide (e.g., Black DiamondTM (BD)). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C.
- BD Black DiamondTM
- a dielectric constant of about 3.0 a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 microns per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about 5-6 ⁇ 10 8 dyne/cm 2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.42 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers).
- Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters.
- step 810 the substrate is transferred from the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a to the factory interface 304 (unless an anti-reflection coating is first deposited on the substrate within one of the chambers 322 a , 322 b ), and the substrate is inspected via the integrated inspection system 330 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the defect detection tool 332 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following low K dielectric layer deposition within the second low K dielectric deposition chamber 318 a and/or may be inspected within the metrology tool 334 to determine the thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, refractive index, etc., of the first and/or the second low K dielectric layers deposited within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., the first and second T2 low K dielectric layers 904 , 920 ). Similar information may be obtained regarding any anti-reflection coating deposited on the substrate within the anti-reflection coating deposition chambers 322 a , 322 b . Information regarding the substrate then is communicated to the module controller 120 ; and the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette from which it was extracted.
- step 811 the module controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers have an acceptable thicknesses, uniformities, indices of refraction, stress levels, etc.). If one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers are not acceptable, in step 812 , the module controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 813 ; otherwise following step 811 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 813 .
- the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers have an acceptable thicknesses, uniformities, indices of refraction, stress levels, etc.). If one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers are not acceptable, in step 812 , the module controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 813 ; otherwise following step 811 , the
- step 813 the module controller 120 determines if all substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If all substrates in the substrate cassette have not been processed, the process 800 returns to step 803 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to process as described previously; otherwise the process 800 proceeds to step 814 .
- the substrate cassette is transferred from the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 to the lithography tool 104 .
- the lithography tool 104 may include, for example, an FSI P2500 system manufactured by FSI International, Inc. for depositing an anti-reflection coating such as a bottom anti-reflection coating (BARC) layer, a DNS-80B system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for forming a uniform photoresist layer over the surface of a substrate, an ASML-5500/90 photoresist exposure system manufactured by ASM Lithography Inc.
- BARC bottom anti-reflection coating
- DNS-80B system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen
- lithography tools for exposing a photoresist layer to a desired mask pattern, and a DNS system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for developing the exposed photoresist layer (thereby forming the desired patterned masking layer).
- lithography tools are well known in the art; and any other conventional lithography tool may be similarly employed.
- step 815 a masking layer is deposited on and is patterned for each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette.
- each non-defective substrate is processed as follows:
- photoresist e.g., TOK P419 manufactured by TOK or a similar resist
- the substrate e.g., a photoresist layer 924 shown patterned in FIG. 9D
- the photoresist is patterned (e.g., exposed and developed) to form one or more patterned masking layer features (e.g., patterned masking layer features 924 a - c in FIG. 9D) for subsequent etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 as described below.
- patterned masking layer features e.g., patterned masking layer features 924 a - c in FIG. 9D
- the substrate cassette is transferred to the etch tool 106 ; and the substrate cassette is loaded into the factory interface 404 of the etch tool 106 .
- the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a - d of the factory interface 404 .
- a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and in step 818 , the patterned masking layer of the substrate (e.g., the patterned masking layer 924 formed on the substrate by the lithography tool 104 as previously described, and used to define the regions of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 to be etched) is inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 . Assuming the etch tool 106 of FIG.
- steps 817 and 818 may be performed by employing the substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a - d ), and by transferring the substrate to the metrology tool 424 b via the substrate handler 418 . Thereafter the metrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's patterned masking layer and may communicate information about the patterned masking layer to the module controller 120 . For example, the metrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as pattern density, patterned masking layer feature information (e.g., size, profile or the like), etc., for the features 924 a - b of FIG. 9D to the module controller 120 .
- information such as pattern density, patterned masking layer feature information (e.g., size, profile or the like), etc.
- An integrated metrology tool similarly may be coupled to the lithography tool 104 and employed to measure and communicate patterned masking layer information to the module controller 120 in place of or in addition to the metrology tool 424 b of the etch tool 106 .
- a standalone metrology tool (not shown) may also be employed.
- One such stand alone metrology tool is the SEM 7830 SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.
- the module controller 120 determines whether the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate is acceptable. For example, the module controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 924 ) is overpatterned (e.g., has features 924 a - c that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., has features 924 a - c that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too narrow).
- the patterned masking layer e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 924
- the module controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 924 ) is overpatterned (e.g., has features 924 a - c that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., has features 924 a - c that will result in second T2
- the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 820 ) and the process 800 proceeds to step 821 ; otherwise the process 800 proceeds directly to step 821 .
- Defective substrates may be sorted and returned to the lithography tool 104 for re-processing after all substrates within the substrate cassette have been processed within the etch tool 106 .
- the target width for the features 924 a - c is about 0.27-0.29 microns with a uniformity variation of less than 10%, although any other suitable feature dimensions/uniformity variations may be employed.
- the substrate is transferred from the factory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a - d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408 ).
- the module controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a - d based on, for example, the information obtained about the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate (e.g., pattern density information, dimensions and/or profile of features of the patterned masking layer which may influence etch dimensions/profile, etc.).
- This type of information constitutes one example of feedforward information. It will be understood that the etch process may be determined based on patterned masking layer information (or other feedforward information) at any time after the information is received from the metrology tool 424 b (or any other metrology tool).
- the etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on, for example, information obtained from the integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process). This type of information constitutes feedback information.
- the module controller 120 may determine an etch process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner.
- the module controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206 ) a library of etch processes each of which has been optimized for a particular patterned masking layer density, feature dimensions, feature profile, etc.
- the module controller 120 may determine an etch process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored etch processes.
- the module controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected etch process to better match the characteristics of the substrate.
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for an etch process include source power, substrate bias power, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, process gas flow rates, etc., which may affect one or more of etched feature dimensions (e.g., width or depth), etched feature profile, etch rate, etch uniformity, etc.
- an O 2 etch process is employed to etch the BARC layer 922
- a CF 4 , N 2 , CO, Ar, and/or CHF 3 etch process is employed to etch the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 to expose the underlying first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 .
- the module controller 120 may, for example, based on feedforward information about a patterned masking layer and/or feedback information about a previously etched substrate, adjust etched feature dimensions/profile by adjusting CHF 3 , O 2 and/or other etch gas flow rates, chamber pressure (e.g., processing pressure), etch time, source power, substrate bias power, etc., during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 .
- the module controller 120 may compare a dimension of a feature of a patterned masking layer (i.e., a feedforward feature dimension) to a target feature dimension (e.g., a desired or ideal feature dimension of a patterned masking layer). For example, the module controller 120 may compare the feedforward feature dimension to a range of acceptable feature dimensions or some other applicable control limit (CL), such as a device specification.
- a feedforward feature dimension a dimension of a feature of a patterned masking layer
- a target feature dimension e.g., a desired or ideal feature dimension of a patterned masking layer.
- CL applicable control limit
- the module controller 120 may determine if an etch process suitable for etching a substrate having a patterned masking layer with the target feature dimension may be adjusted to correct for any deviation between the feedforward feature dimension and the target feature dimension (e.g., whether any required process adjustment is within the range or control limit of acceptable process adjustments). If so, then the module controller 120 may adjust the etch process accordingly.
- the module controller 120 may increase or decrease etch gas (e.g., CHF 3 , O 2 , etc.) and/or other gas (e.g., Ar, N 2 , etc.) flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 and/or the BARC layer 922 to compensate for the smaller or larger than desired patterned masking layer feature width.
- etch gas e.g., CHF 3 , O 2 , etc.
- other gas e.g., Ar, N 2 , etc.
- the module controller 120 also may compensate for smaller or larger patterned masking layer feature width by increasing or decreasing overetch time, chamber pressure, bias power, source power and/or the like during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 and/or the BARC layer 922 .
- Other techniques may be similarly employed.
- an etch process may be determined based on feedback information regarding a previously etched substrate.
- a characteristic of an etched feature of the previously etched substrate i.e., a feedback etched feature characteristic
- a target etched feature characteristic e.g., a desired or ideal etched feature characteristic
- the module controller 120 may determine an etch process based on the etch process used to etch the previous substrate (e.g., by adjusting certain etch parameters of the process). For example, assume the feedback etched feature characteristic is etched feature width.
- the module controller 120 may increase or decrease etched feature width for subsequently etched substrates by increasing or decreasing etch gas and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 and/or the BARC layer 922 .
- the module controller 120 similarly may compensate by increasing or decreasing overetch time, chamber pressure, bias power, source power and/or the like during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 and/or the BARC layer 922 .
- Other techniques may be similarly employed.
- the feedback etched feature characteristic is etched feature profile. If the etched feature profile of the previously etched substrate is less or more vertical than the target profile, then the module controller 120 may increase or decrease etched feature profile angle for subsequently etched substrates by adjusting etch gas and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 .
- Other exemplary feedback information that may be employed to affect an etch process includes (1) etch depth to affect etch time (e.g., which may be increased to increase etch depth); and/or (2) within-wafer etch uniformity to affect magnetic field strength (e.g., to improve uniformity as described further below).
- the module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on patterned masking layer density, feature dimensions, feature profile, or other feedforward information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted via algorithms based on feedback information regarding a substrate previously etched within the etch tool 106 (e.g., if previously formed etch features were too deep, too shallow, too narrow, too wide, had an undesirable profile, if a previously etched substrate had too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic).
- feedback information regarding the defect density of a previously etched substrate may be employed to affect the length of time and/or how often an etch chamber is cleaned following etching or seasoned following chamber maintenance, O 2 flow or source power during patterned masking layer removal (e.g., during ashing), etc., so as to reduce defect density, polymeric residue and the like.
- defect density feedback information may be used to determine when to perform an etch chamber clean (e.g., if defect density exceeds a predetermined threshold). In this manner, an etch chamber need not be cleaned prematurely. This may reduce the number of chamber cleanings (and thus chamber seasonings) that are performed and thus decrease chamber downtime.
- FIG. 10B( 1 ) and FIG. 10B( 2 ) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an etch process.
- information regarding a patterned masking layer present on a substrate may be used to affect other processing tools such as the lithography tool 104 used to define the patterned masking layer.
- the module controller 120 (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedback information about the-patterned masking layer formed by a given lithography process, one or more parameters of the lithography process to affect future patterned masking layer formation.
- Adjustable process parameters of the lithography tool 104 used to form a patterned masking layer include, for example, soft/hard bake times, dose of a lithographic process, exposure time, development time, masking layer deposition time, spin rates, etc.
- the module controller 120 directs the etch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process.
- the module controller 120 directs the etch tool 106 to remove the patterned masking layer from the substrate.
- any conventional technique may be employed to remove the patterned masking layer (e.g., such as the use of an oxygen plasma, often referred to as “ashing”).
- ashing may be performed in-situ (e.g., within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d ), or ex-situ (e.g., within a separate ashing chamber (not shown)).
- FIG. 9E illustrates the second T 2 low K dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patterned masking layer 924 and the BARC layer 922 .
- the BARC layer 922 may be removed by, for example, an O 2 plasma.
- etched features 920 a - c are formed within the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 which expose the underlying first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 .
- residual polymeric material may remain on the sidewalls of the etched features 920 a - c (which may subsequently be removed via the cleaning tool 108 as described further below).
- Typical etched features 920 a - c may have profiles of 88-90 degrees (e.g., near vertical profiles). Other defect densities or etched feature profiles may be employed.
- the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a - d to the factory interface 404 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the defect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within the metrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 .
- Information regarding the substrate is communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 827 the module controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etched substrate is not acceptable, in step 828 , the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 829 ; otherwise following step 827 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 829 .
- the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 829 ; otherwise following step 827 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 829 .
- step 829 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, the process 800 returns to step 817 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise the process 800 proceeds to step 830 .
- the substrate cassette is transferred from the etch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.).
- the module controller 120 directs the cleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques.
- one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ dilute hydrofluoric acid, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates.
- the cleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following removal of the patterned masking layer employed during the etching of each substrate.
- the cleaning tool 108 comprises a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion.
- step 832 the substrate cassette is transferred from the cleaning tool 108 back to the lithography tool 104 .
- one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108 .
- One exemplary stand-alone metrology tool suitable for measuring etched feature dimensions/profile is the SEM 7830SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.
- a masking layer is deposited on and is patterned for each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette.
- each non-defective substrate is processed as follows:
- the photoresist is patterned (e.g., exposed and developed) to form one or more patterned masking layer features (e.g., patterned masking layer features 928 a - b in FIG. 9F) for subsequent etching of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 as described below.
- patterned masking layer features e.g., patterned masking layer features 928 a - b in FIG. 9F
- the substrate cassette is transferred to the etch tool 106 ; and the substrate cassette is loaded into the factory interface 404 of the etch tool 106 .
- the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a - d of the factory interface 404 .
- step 835 a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and in step 836 , the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned masking layer 928 formed on the substrate by the lithography tool 104 as previously described and used to define second regions of the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 to be etched) is inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 .
- the etch tool 106 of FIG. 4A is employed within the system 100
- steps 835 and 836 may be performed by employing the substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a - d ), and by transferring the substrate to the metrology tool 424 b via the substrate handler 418 .
- the metrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's patterned masking layer and may communicate information about the patterned masking layer 928 to the module controller 120 .
- the metrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as pattern density, patterned masking layer feature information (e.g., size, profile or the like), etc., for the features 928 a - b of FIG. 9F to the module controller 120 .
- An integrated metrology tool similarly may be coupled to the lithography tool 104 and employed to measure and communicate patterned masking layer information to the module controller 120 in place of or in addition to the metrology tool 424 b of the etch tool 106 .
- a stand-alone metrology tool (not shown) may also be employed.
- the module controller 120 determines whether the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate is acceptable. For example, the module controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 928 ) is overpatterned (e.g., has features 928 a - b that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., has features 928 a - b that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too narrow).
- the patterned masking layer e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 928
- the module controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 928 ) is overpatterned (e.g., has features 928 a - b that will result in second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., has features 928 a - b that will result in second T2
- the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 838 ) and the process 800 proceeds to step 839 ; otherwise the process 800 proceeds directly to step 839 .
- Defective substrates may be sorted and returned to the lithography tool 104 for re-processing after all substrates within the substrate cassette have been processed within the etch tool 106 .
- the target width for the features 928 a - b is about 0.33-0.35 microns with a uniformity variation of less than 10%, although any other suitable feature dimensions/uniformity variations may be employed.
- step 839 the substrate is transferred from the factory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a - d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408 ).
- the module controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a - d based on, for example, the information obtained about the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate (e.g., pattern density information, dimensions and/or profile of features of the patterned masking layer which may influence etched feature dimensions/profile, etc.) as described previously with reference to step 822 .
- the etch process may be determined based on patterned masking layer information (or other feedforward information) at any time after the information is received from the metrology tool 424 b (or any other metrology tool).
- the etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on, for example, information obtained from the integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process) as described previously with reference to step 822 .
- FIG. 10B( 1 ) and FIG. 10B( 2 ) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. As stated, these process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an etch process.
- the module controller 120 directs the etch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process.
- the module controller 120 directs the etch tool 106 to remove the patterned masking layer from the substrate.
- the patterned masking layer is formed from photoresist
- any conventional technique may be employed to remove the patterned masking layer (e.g., such as the use of an oxygen plasma to perm ashing).
- ashing may be performed in-situ (e.g., within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d ) or ex-situ (e.g., within a separate ashing chamber (not shown)).
- FIG. 9G illustrates the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patterned masking layer 928 and the BARC layer 926 .
- etched features 920 d - e e.g., lines 920 d-e
- FIG. 9G illustrates the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patterned masking layer 928 and the BARC layer 926 .
- etched features 920 d - e e.g., lines 920 d-e
- FIG. 9G illustrates the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patterned masking layer 928 and the BARC layer 926 .
- etched features 920 d - e e.g., lines 920 d-e
- FIG. 9G illustrates the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patterned masking layer 928 and the BARC layer 926 .
- Typical etched features 920 d - e may have profiles of 88-90 degrees (e.g., near vertical profiles). Other defect densities or etched feature profiles may be employed.
- the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a - d to the factory interface 404 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the defect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within the metrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 .
- Information regarding the substrate is communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 845 the module controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the second T2 low K dielectric layer 920 have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etched substrate is not acceptable, in step 846 , the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 847 ; otherwise following step 845 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 847 .
- the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 847 ; otherwise following step 845 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 847 .
- step 847 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, the process 800 returns to step 835 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise the process 800 proceeds to step 848 .
- step 848 the substrate cassette is transferred from the etch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.).
- the module controller 120 directs the cleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques.
- one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ dilute hydrofluoric acid, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates.
- the cleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following removal of the patterned masking layer employed during the etching of each substrate.
- the cleaning tool 108 comprises a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion.
- step 850 the substrate cassette is transferred from the cleaning tool 108 back to the etch tool 106 .
- one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108 .
- a stand-alone metrology tool suitable for measuring etched feature dimensions/profile is the SEM 7830 SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.
- One exemplary stand-alone defect detection tool suitable for measuring defect density is the WF736 DUO defect detection system also manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Other similar tools may be employed.
- the substrate cassette is loaded into the factory interface 404 of the etch tool 106 .
- the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a - d of the factory interface 404 .
- step 851 a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and in step 852 , rather than employing the previously described stand-alone inspection systems, the substrate may be inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 of the etch tool 106 to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108 .
- steps 851 and 852 may be performed by employing the substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a - d ), and by transferring the substrate to the metrology tool 424 b via the substrate handler 418 .
- the metrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's etched features (e.g., features 920 d - e ) and may communicate information about the etched features to the module controller 120 .
- the metrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as etched feature density, size, profile or the like (following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108 ). Defect density or classification information may be similarly obtained via the defect detection tool 424 a , and communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 853 the module controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable. For example, the module controller 120 may determine that the etched features are too large or too small, that the substrate has too high of a defect density or was improperly cleaned, etc. If the substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 854 ) and the process 800 returns to step 851 ; otherwise process 800 proceeds directly to step 855 .
- step 855 the substrate is transferred from the factory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a -d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408 ).
- step 856 the module controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a -d in order to remove the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 exposed by the etched features 920 a - c (FIG. 9B).
- the etch process may be based on, for example, (1) information obtained about the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 (e.g., feedforward information such as thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, index of refraction, density, defect density, etc., of the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 as provided by the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 ); (2) information such as the dimensions/profile of the etched features 920 a - c and/or 920 d - e as provided by the integrated inspection system 422 of the etch tool 106 ; or (3) based on other feedforward information (in a manner similar to that described with reference to step 822 ).
- feedforward information such as thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, index of refraction, density, defect density, etc.
- the etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a - d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process), in a manner similar to that described with reference to step 822 .
- a CHF 3 , O 2 and Ar etch chemistry may be employed to etch the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 .
- the module controller 120 may, for example, based on the feedforward information (e.g., about the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 , the etched features 920 a - c and/or 920 d - e , etc.) and/or feedback information about a previously etched substrate (e.g., etch depth, etch profile, etc., of a previously etched low K dielectric layer) adjust etching of the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 by adjusting CHF 3 , O 2 , Ar and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios, chamber pressure, etch time, source power, substrate bias, etc., during etching.
- the feedforward information e.g., about the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 , the etched features 920 a - c and/or 920 d - e
- FIG. 10B( 1 ) and FIG. 10B( 2 ) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information.
- FIG. 9H illustrates the substrate 902 following etching of the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 . As shown in FIG. 9H, following etching, copper plugs 918 a , 918 b and 918 d are exposed.
- the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a - d to the factory interface 404 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the integrated inspection system 422 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the defect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within the metrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 .
- Information regarding the substrate is communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 860 the module controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the first T2 low K dielectric layer have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etch substrate is not acceptable, in step 861 , the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 862 ; otherwise following step 860 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 862 .
- the module controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 862 ; otherwise following step 860 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 862 .
- step 862 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, the process 800 returns to step 851 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise the process 800 proceeds to step 863 .
- step 863 the substrate cassette is transferred from the etch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.).
- the module controller 120 directs the cleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques.
- one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ an appropriate solvent and/or other chemicals, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates.
- the cleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following etching of the first T2 dielectric layer (e.g., layer 904 in FIG. 9H).
- the etch and clean tool 106 ′ of FIG. 4B may be employed within the inventive system 100 .
- any cleaning step following etching e.g., step 831 , 849 and 864 in process 800
- the cleaning chamber 430 and/or 432 may be employed, rather than within the cleaning tool 108 .
- fewer inter-tool transfer operations e.g., steps 830 , 832 , 848 , 850 , 863 and/or 865 ) need be performed, thereby increasing system throughput.
- the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 (exposed by etched features 920 a - c ) may be etched (opened) immediately after ashing, either within the same chamber used for ashing or within a separate etch chamber of the etch tool 106 . In this manner, one or more of steps 850 - 864 of the process 800 may be eliminated. System throughput thereby may be increased.
- the substrate cassette is transferred from the cleaning tool 108 to the anneal furnace 110 .
- the anneal furnace 110 may be a Canary Furnace manufactured by Canary or any other suitable furnace.
- each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette is annealed.
- the anneal process may comprise an approximately 30 minute argon anneal at 300° C., although another suitable anneal process may be employed (e.g., to degas and dry out the each substrate).
- the substrate cassette is transferred from the annealing furnace to the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 .
- one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108 , etc., as previously described.
- the substrate cassette is loaded into the factory interface 504 of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 .
- the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 522 a - d of the factory interface 504 .
- step 869 a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette.
- etched features e.g., vias and/or lines such as the etched features 920 a - e
- the integrated inspection system 524 of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 Assuming the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 of FIG.
- steps 869 and 870 may be performed by employing the substrate handler 520 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 522 a - d ), and by transferring the substrate to the metrology tool 524 b via the substrate handler 518 . Thereafter the metrology tool 524 b may inspect the substrate's etched features and may communicate information about the etched features to the module controller 120 . For example, the metrology tool 524 b may communicate information such as etched feature density, etched feature dimensions (e.g., via and/or line width, depth, profile, etc.) or the like to the module controller 120 .
- the module controller 120 determines whether the etched features formed on the substrate are acceptable. For example, the module controller 120 may determine that etched features such as the etched features 920 a - e are overpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too narrow). If the etched features on the substrate are not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette, the substrate is marked as a defective substrate (step 872 ) and the process 800 returns to step 869 to obtain another substrate; otherwise the process 800 proceeds directly to step 873 .
- etched features such as the etched features 920 a - e are overpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too narrow).
- step 873 the substrate is transferred from the factory interface 504 to a degas chamber (e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a - c ) via the substrate handler 508 a , and the substrate is degassed.
- a degas chamber e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a - c
- Any suitable degas process may be employed such as a conventional heated wafer chuck or lamp heated degas process.
- step 874 the substrate is transferred to the preclean chamber 511 via the substrate handler 508 a , the substrate handler 508 b and the pass-through 526 (as previously described) and the substrate is precleaned.
- Any suitable preclean process may be employed such as a conventional preclean process (e.g., employing Ar, He, H 2 or N 2 sputtering) or a reactive preclean process (e.g., employing a fluorine based reactive species).
- the preclean process may be based on information regarding the etched features present on the substrate (e.g., information such as etched feature density, dimensions, profile, etc., measured by the metrology tool 524 b of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 or the etch tool 106 ).
- information regarding the etched features present on the substrate e.g., information such as etched feature density, dimensions, profile, etc., measured by the metrology tool 524 b of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 or the etch tool 106 .
- sputter yield may be proportional to via size and aspect ratio, and dependent on the type of dielectric in which the via is formed. The preclean process may be adjusted to compensate for these and other factors.
- the substrate is transferred to the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 via the substrate handler 508 b .
- the module controller 120 determines a barrier layer deposition process to perform on the substrate within the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 based on the information obtained about the etched features formed on the substrate (e.g., etched feature density information, dimension information, profile information, or other feedforward information). It will be understood that the barrier layer deposition process may be determined based on etched feature information at any time after the information is received from the metrology tool 524 b (or from another metrology tool).
- the barrier layer deposition process alternatively or additionally may be based on (feedback) information obtained from the integrated inspection system 524 for a barrier layer previously deposited within the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 (e.g., information such as deposited barrier layer thickness for a given deposition process, defect density or the like).
- the module controller 120 may determine a barrier layer deposition process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner.
- the module controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206 ) a library of barrier layer deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, etc.
- the module controller 120 may determine a barrier layer deposition process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored barrier layer deposition processes.
- the module controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected barrier layer deposition process to better match the characteristics of the substrate.
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a barrier layer deposition process include RF bias, DC power, wafer bias, chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, etc., which may affect one or more of sheet resistance (R s ), reflectivity, thickness, defect density and uniformity of the deposited barrier layer.
- R s sheet resistance
- the module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on etched feature density, dimensions, profile, or other feedforward information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a barrier layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited barrier layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic).
- FIG. 10C illustrates exemplary process parameters of a barrier layer deposition process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a barrier layer deposition process.
- etched features present on a substrate may be used to affect other processing tools or subsystems such as the lithography tool and etch tool used to form the etched features (e.g., lithography tool 104 and etch tool 106 in FIGS. 1A and 1B).
- the module controller 120 may adjust, based on feedback information about etched features formed by a given process, one or more parameters of the process to affect future etched feature formation.
- Adjustable process parameters of an etch tool used to etch features include, for example, etch time, etch rate, etch chemistry, etc., which may affect one or more of etched feature depth, critical dimension, uniformity, etc.
- Lithography dose of a lithographic process used to define etched features, as well as deposition time of a deposition process used to form an interlayer dielectric layer (in which etched features are formed) similarly may be adjusted based on etched feature feedback information.
- the module controller 120 directs the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 to deposit a barrier layer on the substrate based on the process.
- FIG. 9I illustrates the silicon substrate 902 after a barrier layer 930 has been deposited thereon.
- the barrier layer 930 comprises a 150-250 angstrom TaN layer or Ta/TaN stack.
- Exemplary barrier layer properties include a defect density of less than about thirty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer, a sheet resistance of about 80-87 ohms per square and a uniformity of about 6% or less. Other thicknesses/properties and other materials also may be employed.
- the substrate is transferred from the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 to the seed layer deposition chamber 514 , and the module controller 120 determines a seed layer deposition process to perform on the substrate.
- the seed layer deposition process may be based on the information obtained about the etched features formed on the substrate (e.g., etched feature density information, dimension information, profile information, etc.), based on information obtained about the barrier layer deposited on the substrate (e.g., barrier layer thickness) or based on other feedforward information.
- the seed layer deposition process alternatively or additionally may be based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 524 for a seed layer previously deposited within the seed layer deposition chamber 514 (e.g., information such as deposited seed layer thickness for a given deposition process), or based on other feedback information.
- the module controller 120 may store a library of seed layer deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, etc. Based on feedforward information about the etched features on which a seed layer is to be deposited, the module controller 120 may determine a seed layer deposition process and/or vary process parameters accordingly. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a seed layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited seed layer was too thin, too thick, had too high of a defect density or some other desirable characteristics).
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a seed layer deposition process based on feedforward information (e.g., etched feature information) and/or feedback information (e.g., information about a previously deposited seed layer) include, for example, RF bias, DC power, wafer bias, chamber base pressure, processing pressure processing temperature, processing time, processing power, etc., which may affect one or more of sheet resistance (R s ), reflectivity, thickness, defect density and uniformity of a deposited seed layer.
- R s sheet resistance
- the above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a seed layer deposition process to perform.
- FIG. 10C summarizes these process parameters.
- step 878 the module controller 120 directs the seed layer deposition chamber 514 to deposit a seed layer on the substrate based on the process.
- FIG. 9J illustrates the substrate 902 following deposition of a seed layer 932 (step 878 ) thereon.
- the seed layer 932 comprises about 1000-2000 angstroms of copper, although other materials and other thicknesses may be employed.
- Other exemplary seed layer properties include a resistivity of about 0.12 ohms per square and a uniformity of about 10% or less. Other seed layer property values may be used.
- the substrate is transferred from the seed layer deposition chamber 514 to the factory interface 504 , and the substrate is inspected via the integrated inspection system 524 .
- the substrate may be inspected via the defect detection tool 524 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following seed layer deposition and/or may be inspected within the metrology tool 524 b to determine the thickness and/or sheet resistance of the barrier layer and/or the seed layer deposited on the substrate.
- Information regarding the substrate then is communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 880 the module controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the barrier layer and/or the seed layer have an acceptable thickness, etc.). If the substrate is not acceptable, in step 881 , the module controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 882 ; otherwise following step 880 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 882 .
- the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the barrier layer and/or the seed layer have an acceptable thickness, etc.). If the substrate is not acceptable, in step 881 , the module controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 882 ; otherwise following step 880 , the process 800 proceeds directly to step 882 .
- step 882 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been processed, the process 800 returns to step 869 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to process as described previously; otherwise the process 800 proceeds to step 883 .
- the substrate cassette is transferred from the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 to the electroplating tool 114 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.).
- the substrate cassette then is loaded into the factory interface 604 of the electroplating tool 114 .
- a non-defective substrate is obtained from the substrate cassette (e.g., via the substrate handler 620 or 622 ) and, in step 885 , the substrate is transferred to one of the electroplating chambers 612 a - d (e.g., via the substrate handler 608 after being oriented with the orienter 624 ).
- the module controller 120 determines an electroplating process to perform on the substrate based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 524 of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 (or another tool such as the etch tool 106 ) and/or based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 628 or 630 of the electroplating tool 114 for a substrate previously processed within one of the electroplating chambers 612 a - d . For example, when step 870 is performed on a substrate, module controller 120 receives information about the density/dimensions/profile of the etched features present on the substrate and stores this information (e.g., with the data storage device 206 ) for the substrate.
- module controller 120 receives information about the barrier layer and/or seed layer formed on the substrate (e.g., barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, defect density, etc.) and stores this information for the substrate.
- information about the barrier layer and/or seed layer formed on the substrate e.g., barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, defect density, etc.
- the module controller 120 may retrieve this information for the substrate to be processed, and based on the density/dimensions/profile of the etched features present on the substrate, the thickness of the barrier layer and seed layer deposited on the substrate, and/or other feedforward information, the module controller 120 may select the appropriate electroplating process to be performed on the substrate (e.g., a process that deposits a fill layer that adequately fills each etched feature of the substrate). Information about a previously processed substrate similarly may be employed to determine the fill layer process (e.g., information such as defect density, fill layer thickness, etc., for a previously processed substrate).
- the module controller 120 may store a library of electroplating processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, barrier layer thickness, barrier layer material, seed layer thickness, seed layer material, etc. Based on feedforward information about the etched features to be electroplated, the deposited barrier layer, the deposited seed layer, and/or the like, the module controller 120 may determine an electroplating process and/or vary process parameters of an electroplating process accordingly.
- one or more process parameters of an electroplating process may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a fill layer previously formed on a substrate (e.g., if the previously formed fill layer is too thick, too thin, has too high of a defect density or some other undesirable or non-optimized characteristic).
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for an electroplating process based on feedforward information e.g., etched feature information, barrier layer information, seed layer information, etc.
- feedback information e.g., information about a previously formed fill layer
- plating process parameters such as flow rate, Z-height (e.g., the distance between anode and substrate), substrate rotation rate, plating current, plating voltage, immersion rotation rate (e.g., the speed with which a substrate is rotated during plating), immersion voltage (e.g., the voltage applied while the substrate is being immersed in the bath), anode amp-hr, contact ring amp-hr, time, etc.;
- electrolyte/bath process parameters such as bath temperature, chemical acidity, electrolyte/bath chemistry (e.g., organic polymer additive concentrations that affect corner rounding, reduce void formation during via filling and/or reduce delamination of plated material such as leveler, enhancer and/or suppressor concentrations, other additive concentrations, etc.), flow rate, etc.; and
- anneal process parameters such as temperature uniformity across each substrate, gas flow rates, anneal pressure before, during or after annealing, anneal time, etc.
- the above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an electroplating process to perform, and may affect one or more of the following characteristics of the electroplated fill layer: thickness, sheet resistance (R s ), uniformity, reflectivity, fill properties, defect density, contamination on substrate backside, etc.
- R s sheet resistance
- FIG. 10D summarizes these process parameters.
- step 886 the module controller 120 directs the electroplating tool 114 (via one of the electroplating chambers 612 a - d ) to form a fill layer (e.g., copper) on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with the process determined in step 885 ).
- FIG. 9K illustrates the silicon substrate 902 following formation of a fill layer 934 thereon within one of the electroplating chambers 612 a - d .
- the fill layer 934 comprises approximately 1 micron of copper.
- the copper fill layer 934 may be formed by any known electroplating technique such as the interaction of a copper sulfide base solution with an H 2 SO 4 solution. Other fill layer thicknesses and materials may be employed. Exemplary copper fill layer properties include a defect density of less than fifty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer, a resistivity of about 0.18-0.02 ohm-cm, a uniformity of about 3% and a reflectivity of greater than 100% when compared to bare silicon. Other property values may be employed.
- step 887 the substrate is transferred from the appropriate electroplating chamber 612 a - d to the integrated bevel cleaner 614 .
- the module controller 120 then directs the integrated bevel cleaner 614 to clean the edge of the substrate.
- step 888 the substrate is transferred to the spin rinse dryer 616 , and the module controller 120 directs the spin rinse dryer 616 to clean/rinse/dry the substrate.
- step 889 the substrate is transferred to one of the anneal chambers 627 a , 627 b (e.g., via the substrate handler 608 and one of the substrate handlers 620 , 622 ).
- the module controller 120 directs the anneal chamber 627 a to anneal the substrate as previously described.
- substrates may be annealed in batch (e.g., within the annealing furnace 110 ).
- An exemplary annealing process may comprise an approximately 30 minute argon anneal at 350° C., although other annealing processes may be employed.
- the substrate is inspected by the integrated inspection system 628 of the factory interface 604 and is returned to the substrate cassette.
- the defect detection tool 628 a may analyze the surface of the fill layer to determine the defect density and/or to characterize or classify defects present on the surface of the fill layer.
- the metrology tool 628 b also may determine the thickness of the electroplated fill layer and/or other material parameters (e.g., film density, film quality, etc., as is known in the art). The above information is communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 891 the module controller 120 determines whether the fill layer formed on the substrate is acceptable (e.g., has the proper thickness, the proper material characteristics, a low enough defect density, etc.). If the fill layer is not acceptable, in step 892 the substrate is marked as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 893 ; otherwise the process 800 proceeds directly to step 893 from step 891 .
- the fill layer formed on the substrate is acceptable (e.g., has the proper thickness, the proper material characteristics, a low enough defect density, etc.). If the fill layer is not acceptable, in step 892 the substrate is marked as defective and the process 800 proceeds to step 893 ; otherwise the process 800 proceeds directly to step 893 from step 891 .
- step 893 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If so, the process 800 proceeds to step 894 ; otherwise the process 800 returns to step 884 to obtain another non-defective substrate from the substrate cassette for processing within the electroplating tool 114 as previously described.
- step 894 the substrate cassette is transferred from the electroplating tool 114 to the planarization tool 116 .
- step 895 the substrate cassette is loaded into the factory interface 904 of the planarization tool 116 of FIG. 7A.
- the substrate cassette alternatively may be transferred to the planarization tool 116 ′ of FIG. 7B, wherein a process similar to that described below may be performed.
- a non-defective substrate is obtained from the substrate cassette, and, in step 897 , the substrate is transferred to the load cup 716 of the polishing system 712 (e.g., via the substrate handler 724 and the robot 706 as previously described).
- the module controller 120 determines a planarization process to perform within the planarization tool 116 based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 628 or 630 of the electroplating tool 114 for the substrate and/or based on information obtained from the integrated inspection system 728 of the planarization tool 116 for a substrate previously processed within the planarization tool 116 .
- the module controller 120 may determine the actual thickness of the fill layer deposited on the substrate via the electroplating tool 114 and may determine an appropriate planarization process based thereon (e.g., an appropriate planarization time). Likewise, based on a planarization process previously performed within the planarization tool 116 , the module controller 120 may determine a planarization process.
- the module controller 120 may store a library of planarization processes each of which has been optimized for a particular substrate condition (e.g., a particular fill layer thickness or material, a particular polish stop layer, etc.). Based on feedforward information about the fill layer formed on a substrate, other feedforward information, feedback information about a substrate previously processed within the planarization tool 116 , or other feedback information, the module controller 120 may select one of the stored planarization processes and/or adjust the process parameters of a planarization process to achieve a desired planarization result.
- a particular substrate condition e.g., a particular fill layer thickness or material, a particular polish stop layer, etc.
- Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a planarization process include, for example, retaining ring pressure, membrane and/or inner tube pressure, head pressure, other parameters that affect polish uniformity, slurry or rinsing fluid flow rate, slurry type, slurry concentration, head velocity, substrate rotation rate, polish time, rinse time, various cleaning parameters such as scrub time, spin-rinse-dry time, megasonic cleaning time, etc. Adjusting one or more of these process parameters may affect one or more of polish rate, surface profile, surface uniformity, etc.
- the above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a planarization process to perform.
- FIG. 10E summarizes these process parameters.
- step 898 the module controller 120 directs the planarization tool 116 to planarize the substrate based on the process determined in step 897 .
- the substrate also may be cleaned within the cleaning system 714 as previously described.
- FIG. 9L illustrates the substrate 902 following planarization within the planarization tool 116 .
- the barrier layer 930 , the seed layer 932 and the fill layer 934 form a substantially smooth top surface (with copper features 934 a - b ).
- the barrier layer 930 is used as a polished stop layer. The barrier layer 930 thereafter may be removed to form the structure shown in FIG. 9L.
- following polishing the substrate's top (polished) surface has less than about 700 angstroms of dishing in regions with copper, and less than about 500 angstroms of erosion in non-copper regions, has a defect density of less than about seventy-five 0.25 micron sized particles per 200 mm wafer, and has a uniformity variation that is less than about 3%.
- Other polished surface properties may be employed.
- the planarized substrate is transferred to the integrated inspection system 728 of the planarization tool 116 , is inspected and is returned to the substrate cassette.
- the substrate may be inspected within the defect detection tool 730 a and/or the metrology tool 730 b to determine such information as defect density, surface uniformity, etc., and this information may be communicated to the module controller 120 .
- step 900 the module controller 120 determines if the planarized substrate is acceptable (e.g., has a low enough defect density, has sufficient surface smoothness/planarity, that all fill layer material to be removed has been removed, etc.). If the planarized substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is marked as defective in step 901 and the process 800 proceeds to step 902 ; otherwise if the planarized substrate is acceptable the process 800 proceeds directly to step 902 .
- the planarized substrate is acceptable (e.g., has a low enough defect density, has sufficient surface smoothness/planarity, that all fill layer material to be removed has been removed, etc.). If the planarized substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is marked as defective in step 901 and the process 800 proceeds to step 902 ; otherwise if the planarized substrate is acceptable the process 800 proceeds directly to step 902 .
- step 902 the module controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette have been planarized. If so, the process 800 ends in step 903 ; otherwise the process 800 returns to step 896 to obtain another non-defective substrate from the substrate cassette and to planarize the substrate within the planarization tool 116 as described previously.
- process 800 is merely exemplary of one low K dielectric interconnect formation process that may be performed within the inventive system 100 of FIGS. 1A and 1B.
- Other low K dielectric interconnect formation processes also may be performed by the system 100 . While in process 800 every substrate processed is inspected following low K dielectric deposition, etching, lithography, barrier/seed layer deposition, electroplating and planarization, it will be understood that fewer than every substrate may be inspected following these steps.
- the material layers, material layer thicknesses and other material layer properties described herein are merely exemplary and other suitable materials and material layer properties may be similarly employed. Other process conditions may be employed than those described herein.
- post CMP stand-alone substrate inspection to determine defect density, planarity, etc., such as via the SEM 7830SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) or the WF736 DUO defect detection system both manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.
- post CMP annealing for degas purposes such as within the annealing furnace 110
- post CMP electrical testing e.g., to determine device performance
- post testing cleaning e.g., within one or more conventional cleaning tools.
- the EMC's 102 a - 116 a and/or the APC modules 102 b - 116 b may contain computer program code and/or data structures for performing one or more of the steps of process 800 rather than or in addition to the module controller 120 .
- the program 208 also may contain computer program code and/or data structures for performing one or more of the steps of process 800 .
- FIGS. 11-14C To further aid in understanding the operation of the invention system 100 of FIGS. 1 A-B, several examples of the use of feedforward information to affect device fabrication are provided below with reference to FIGS. 11-14C. It will be understood that these are representative examples, and that other operations may be performed within the system 100 . Each of these examples may be performed via one or more steps of the process 800 of FIGS. 8 A-P or via one or more similar processes and may be implemented within one or more computer program products.
- FIG. 11 is a cross sectional view of a substrate 1102 having a T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 formed over a T1 structure 1106 .
- a patterned masking layer 1108 having features 1108 a - d is formed over the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 so as to define etchable regions therein.
- the thickness of the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 ; and (2) fed forward to the etch tool 106 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- This feedforward thickness information may be used by the etch tool 106 to control, among other things, etch time (e.g., to avoid over or under etching the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 ).
- an optical rate monitor such as an integrated rate monitor (iRM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. or a similar device may be used to monitor etch depth within the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 . Because line/trench depth impacts sheet resistance, accurate control of line/trench depth is important during device fabrication.
- the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 may measure the index of refraction of the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 and feedforward this information to the etch tool 106 . Thereafter, during formation of line/trench features within the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 , the feedforward index of refraction information may be employed by an optical rate monitor associated with the etch tool 106 to achieve accurate depth control of the such features.
- FIG. 12A is a cross sectional view of a substrate 1202 having a T2 low K dielectric layer 1204 formed over a T1 structure 1206 .
- Trench features 1204 a - g are formed within the T2 low K dielectric layer 1204 and are filled with a metal fill layer 1208 .
- the trench depth across the substrate 1202 is non-uniform. That is, the trench depth is greater in the center of the substrate such that trenches 1204 a and 1204 g are the shallowest trenches and trench 1204 d is the deepest trench (as shown).
- the depth of the trenches 1204 a - g may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 422 of the etch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- This feedforward information may be used by the planarization tool 116 to control, among other things, the amount of material removed from the center of the substrate 1202 relative to the edges of the substrate 1202 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the center of the substrate 1202 ). A more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 12B.
- FIG. 13A is a cross sectional view of a substrate 1302 having a T2 low K dielectric layer 1304 formed over a T1 structure 1306 .
- Trench features 1304 a - g are formed within the T2 low K dielectric layer 1304 .
- the T2 low K dielectric layer 1304 is non-uniform in thickness (e.g., is “edge thick”).
- the thickness uniformity of the T2 low K dielectric layer 1304 may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 ; and (2) fed forward to the etch tool 106 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- the etch tool 106 may control formation of the trenches 1304 a - g so that the base of each trench has a similar height above the T1 structure 1306 (e.g., so that the trenches on the edge of the substrate 1302 are deeper than in the center of the substrate 1302 as shown). This may be performed, for example, by controlling (etch chamber magnetron) magnetic field strength which is known to change the etch rate ratio of the center of a substrate to the edge of the substrate (e.g., so as to increase the etch rate toward the edge of the substrate 1302 ).
- the depth and/or depth uniformity of the trenches 1304 a - g may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 422 of the etch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- This feedforward information may be used by the planarization tool 116 to control, among other things, the amount of material removed from the center of the substrate 1302 relative to the edges of the substrate 1302 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the edges of the substrate 1302 ).
- a more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 13B.
- FIG. 14A is a cross sectional view of a substrate 1402 having a T2 low K dielectric layer 1404 formed over a T1 structure 1406 .
- Trench features 1404 a - g are formed within the T2 low K dielectric layer 1404 and are filled with a metal fill layer 1408 .
- the trench depth across the substrate is non-uniform. That is, the trench depth is center deep such that trenches 1404 a and 1404 g are the shallowest trenches and trench 1404 d is the deepest trench (as shown).
- the metal fill layer 1408 is center thick (as shown).
- the depth uniformity of the trenches 1404 a - g may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 422 of the etch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- the thickness uniformity of the metal fill layer 1408 may be (1) measured by the integrated inspection system 628 or 630 of the electroplating tool 114 ; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120 ).
- the planarization tool 116 may employ metal fill layer uniformity information to achieve a uniform metal fill layer such as is shown in FIG. 14B (e.g., by adjusting carrier head pressure to remove more metal from the center of the substrate 1402 than from its edges).
- the planarization tool 116 may use trench depth uniformity information to control, among other things, the amount of the T2 low K dielectric layer 1404 removed from the center of the substrate 1402 relative to the edges of the substrate 1402 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the center of the substrate 1402 ). A more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 14C.
- a similar process may be performed if an edge thick T2 low K dielectric layer (FIG. 13A) and a center thick metal fill layer (FIG. 14A) are deposited on a substrate. Other similar processes may be used to address any combination of center thick and/or center thin layers or trench depths.
- 10 A-E illustrate exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information, it will be understood that numerous other process parameters similarly may be adjusted. For example, if a defect density following a process is too high within a certain tool, the module controller 120 and/or one of the EMC's 102 a - 116 a may perform a cleaning process within the tool, or direct an increase in the season time used following tool maintenance so as to reduce defect density.
- the module controller 120 and/or the EMC's 102 a - 116 a may be employed to monitor tool health.
- a software diagnostic tool such as SmartSysTM which monitors equipment signals (e.g., signals from mass flow controllers, throttle valves, radio frequency sources, etc.) and analyzes such signals for drift may be used in conjunction with the module controllers 120 , and/or 102 a - 116 a by having the module controllers providing other process drift information to the software diagnostic tool, or by having the module controllers adjust process parameters to compensate for process drift (e.g., by increasing process time, flow rates, chamber pressure, etc.).
- Process parameters of a lithography process may be adjusted based on feedback information other than feedback information about a patterned masking layer formed by a given lithography process.
- the module controller 120 (or some other module controller) may adjust one or more parameters of a lithography process to affect future patterned masking layer formation based at least in part on feedback information about etched features formed by an etch process.
- Adjustable process parameters of the lithography tool 104 may include, for example, soft/hard bake times, dose of a lithographic process, exposure time and/or other exposure settings, development time, masking layer deposition time, spin rates, stepper focus, etc.
- a feature such as an etch mask, is formed on a substrate at the lithography tool 104 (e.g., at a photo cell of the lithography tool 104 ).
- Measurements of the critical dimension (CD) and/or CD profile or other parameters of the feature then are measured using an integrated inspection tool (e.g., an in-line optical critical dimension (OCD) measurement unit).
- OCD optical critical dimension
- the measured CD information is linked via a module controller (e.g., module controller 120 ) to adjustable parameters of an etch process of the etch tool 106 , such as etch recipes having different etch chemistries, over-etch properties, etc. If the measured CD information deviates from a desired value, an etch recipe that corrects for the deviation may be fed forward to the etch tool (e.g., and implemented automatically) via the module controller.
- the substrate may be inspected again with an integrated inspection tool (e.g., an in-line OCD unit) and information regarding the substrate may be fed back to a lithography process (e.g., via a module controller).
- an integrated inspection tool e.g., an in-line OCD unit
- information regarding the substrate may be fed back to a lithography process (e.g., via a module controller).
- post etch measurement information may be employed by a module controller to affect stepper focus and/or exposure settings for CD uniformity control.
- etch process adjustable parameters e.g., selection of etch recipes for etch depth uniformity.
- Information regarding photoresist application, exposure and/or development may be employed to affect the lithography process of a subsequent substrate (e.g., by varying stepper focus, exposure settings, etc.). Stepper focus, exposure settings, etc., may be corrected automatically to correct for undesirable process deviations. Substrate-to-substrate and within-substrate CD and trench depth control thereby
- Process parameters of a planarization process may be adjusted based on feedforward information other than feedforward information about etched features formed by an etch process, and based on other than feedforward information about metal layers formed by an electroplating process.
- the module controller 120 (FIG. 1A) (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedforward information about a substrate processed within the dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., deposition tool 102 ), one or more parameters of the planarization process to affect the planarization of a metal layer on that substrate.
- feedforward information may include, for example, a low-k deposition profile, dielectric layer thickness, etc.
- a low-k dielectric deposition process deposits material faster in a center of a substrate than along the edges of the substrate (e.g., a “center-fast” deposition process which produces a center-fast deposition profile)
- information regarding low-k dielectric layer non-uniformity may be fed forward (via a module controller) to a planarization process so as to affect the process (e.g., to compensate for the center-fast deposition profile by performing a center-fast planarization process or other suitable planarization process to compensate for actual deposited dielectric layer properties).
- a planarization process (or processes) for the planarization subsystem (e.g., planarization tool 116 ), may be determined based at least in part on the dielectric deposition layer information for a substrate.
- One or more processing parameters of the planarization process may accordingly be affected.
- One result of affecting the planarization process with feedforward dielectric deposition layer information for a particular substrate may be improved uniformity in post-planarization metal layer thickness within the substrate, which in turn may yield, for example, improved uniformity in metal layer sheet resistance.
- Process parameters of an etch process for a substrate also may be adjusted at least in part based on feedforward information regarding a center-fast deposition profile for the substrate. For example, an etch process that etches faster along a center region of a substrate relative to an edge region of the substrate (e.g., a center-fast etch process) may be employed.
- a center-fast etch process may be employed.
- One result of affecting the etch process with feed forward center-fast deposition profile information may be the achievement of greater etch depth consistency, which in turn may yield improved via chain resistance distribution, and/or improved via chain yield, and/or improvements related to level-to-level capacitance.
- Information regarding any type of dielectric layer including, for example, one or more etch stop layers, or one or more DARC layers, may be used as feedforward information.
- dielectric film thickness for a substrate is fed forward to a module controller so as to affect an etch process.
- a specific etch recipe, a specific etch time, etc. may be affected so as to create a substrate uniformity profile that achieves a consistent etch profile across the substrate based on the dielectric film thickness information. For example, if a center-fast thickness profile is measured for a layer deposited on a substrate (e.g., via the deposition tool 102 ), a module controller may employ a corresponding center-fast etch recipe during subsequent etching to achieve uniform etch depth across the substrate.
- a consistent via open may be achieved for a dual damascene via etch; and via chain resistance distribution and via chain yield may be improved.
- Such a control loop may be employed with all layers of a dual damascene dielectric stack such as etch stop, interlayer dielectric and low K dielectric layers.
- the module controller 120 may adjust, based on feedforward information regarding a center-fast etch profile for a substrate, one or more parameters of a planarization process to affect the planarization of a metal layer on the substrate.
- a planarization process (or processes) for a planarization subsystem, such as a center-fast planarization process, may be determined at least in part based on the center-fast etch profile information for the substrate.
- One or more processing parameters of the planarization process may accordingly be affected.
- One result of determining a center-fast planarization process based at least in part on a feedforward center-fast etch profile may be improved uniformity in post-planarization metal layer thickness for a dual damascene trench.
- Another result may be the elimination of a middle stop layer, as well as the deletion of such processing steps as are necessary to form a middle stop layer.
- profile information regarding a deposited layer is fed forward from the deposition tool 102 (via a module controller) to both the etch tool 106 and the planarization tool 116 .
- a specific etch recipe that creates a similar or otherwise complimentary profile may be used to achieve uniform etch depths; and a specific planarization recipe that creates a similar or otherwise complimentary profile may be used to achieve metal thickness uniformity despite deposited layer uniformity variations.
- a center fast deposition profile is measured for a substrate (e.g., via an integrated inspection system of the deposition tool 102 ) and provided to the module controller 120 , a corresponding center-fast etch recipe may be employed at the etch tool 106 to ensure etch depth uniformity across the substrate. Level-to-level capacitance thereby may be improved. As stated, dielectric thickness profile information also may be fed forward to the planarization tool 116 so that a similar corrective planarization process may be employed. Complete substrate-to-substrate and within-substrate optimization of both metal resistance and level-to-level capacitance (e.g., for M2 metal layers) may be achieved.
- metal layer sheet resistance may be improved by a control loop from the etch tool 106 to the planarization tool 116 (with or without information regarding deposited layer thickness).
- a control loop from the etch tool 106 to the planarization tool 116 (with or without information regarding deposited layer thickness).
- a specific polishing recipe that creates a similar profile can be used to achieve a desired metal thickness uniformity.
- such a system may be used to form a dual damascene trench without a middle stop layer).
- a corresponding center-fast planarization recipe may be employed to achieve the same remaining metal (e.g., copper) thickness across a substrate (as well as across subsequently planarized substrates). Consistency in metal thickness yields minimum variations of metal sheet resistance.
- a “deposition-etch module” may be formed that includes a deposition tool coupled to an etch tool via a module controller (e.g., the module controller 120 ).
- the deposition tool may include a Producer® system available from Applied Materials, Inc. configured with an integrated reflectometer (e.g., a Nanometrics Nano9000 or similar reflectometer).
- the etch tool may include, for example, an eMaxTM plasma etch system available from Applied Materials, Inc. configured with an integrated rate monitor (iRM), described below, and an OCD. Other systems may be employed.
- the module controller may include a model-based process control system that uses run-to-run control to automatically adjust a recipe for a given substrate based on process modeling and data from previously processed substrates.
- the deposition-etch module may be a stand-alone module or part of the system 100 for forming low k dielectric interconnects (FIG. 1A and/or FIG. 1B).
- Such a system has been shown to produce a reduction in process variations during the fabrication of 130 nanometer and below Cu/Low K devices.
- a 0.13 micron triple level metal (TLM) dual damascene process flow was used for device fabrication.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a two level metal Cu/Low K interconnect 1501 formed using the above-described deposition-etch module.
- the interconnect 1501 includes a first metal (M1) layer 1503 fabricated using a single damascene process (forming filled trenches within a first low k interlayer dielectric 1505 ).
- the first low k interlayer dielectric 1505 was formed over a first etch stop layer 1507 , such as silicon nitride, (formed over a pre-metal dielectric (PMD), undoped silicon glass (USG) layer 1509 ).
- PMD pre-metal dielectric
- USG undoped silicon glass
- First vias 1511 and a second metal (M2) layer 1513 were fabricated together using “via first” dual damascene integration (within a second low k interlayer dielectric 1515 formed over a second etch stop layer 1517 ).
- a pad metal connection 1519 was formed over the second metal layer 1513 which includes a third etch stop layer 1521 , an undoped silicon glass interlayer dielectric 1523 , metal lines 1525 and pad metal 1527 as shown.
- An Applied Materials' Producer® CVD system was used to deposit the low k dielectric layers 1505 , 1509 (e.g., fluorinated silicon glass (FSG) or Black Diamonds).
- An ASML 5500/90 248 deep UV stepper (0.5 NA) was employed to define patterns for both via and trench etch using an Applied Materials' TLM Back End of Line test mask.
- An Applied Materials' eMaxTM etcher was used for both via and trench patterning.
- the module controller continuously collects process information and uses this data to optimize the deposition and/or etch tool processes using feedback or feedforward control loops (or stops a tool if too large of an excursion occurs).
- the module controller is a model-based process control system that uses run-to-run control to automatically adjust the recipe for given substrate based on process modeling and data from previously processed substrates.
- a design of experiment DOE with up to a 10% process window may be employed. Data collected from the DOE may be used to construct a model and validated against run results. Once a process model is developed, it may be used to predict an optimal combination of manipulated input variables to achieve a target output (of a processing tool).
- Optimized variables may be incorporated into tool recipe management. For example, if a measured output result does not match a predicted value, feedback information may be employed to correct subsequent substrate processing. If process mean output exceeds a process control limit, a warning may be issued and/or the deposition/etch module may shut down to prevent substrate scrap.
- Substrate-to-substrate variation was greatly reduced through use of the feedforward data (closed loop) when compared to a fixed time etch (open loop). Such via etch repeatability may enable a reduction in the required selectivity for the etch stop layer. Alternatively, etch stop layer thickness may be reduced, lowering the effective k value of the dielectric film stack.
- the deposition/etch process module also may provide trench etch endpoint monitor/control capability (e.g., such as for a second level (T2) trench of a dual damascene interconnect).
- trench etch endpoint monitor/control capability e.g., such as for a second level (T2) trench of a dual damascene interconnect.
- an integrated etch rate monitor, iRM such as that described in Z. Sui et al., “Integrated process control using an in-situ sensor for etch,” Solid State Technology, April 2002, may be employed for in-situ monitoring of a trench etch process to achieve consistent trench etch depth (e.g., by monitoring interferometric fringes at about 214 nanometers to determine target etch depth).
- Other rate monitors may be employed.
- any etch rate changes due to incoming film properties and/or etch chamber conditions may be captured and provided to the module controller in real time.
- the module controller then may adjust the etch process accordingly (e.g., in real time).
- a higher Cpk value of removed film thickness was demonstrated on blanket substrates through feedback control using an iRM during etch processing with the etch tool.
- Table 1.0 illustrates exemplary standard deviation (Stdev) and Cpk values for (1) a deposition with and without feedback; (2) a via etch with and without feedforward of deposited layer thickness information to an etch tool; and (3) a T2 trench etch with and without feedback (e.g., from in-situ monitoring).
- Patterned device substrates with various deposition-etch splits were used to test the impacts of process perturbations and feedback control on device electrical performance.
- film thickness was intentionally varied from the target thickness by approximately ⁇ 5%.
- via etch some substrates were etched with dielectric thickness feeding forward to the etch tool and some without such feedforward information.
- substrates were split into timed etch and etch with feedback control using an iRM. Table 2.0 summarizes the results of such closed loop and open loop operation.
- Level-to-level capacitance was found to be mainly affected by via dielectric thickness, assuming a relative consistency in M2 trench etch.
- the substrate-to-substrate variation of parallel capacitance was reduced from about 7.3% for DOE substrates to about 1.9% using feedback control.
- Substrate-to-substrate variation of via resistance for process module controlled substrates was significantly less than for time-etched substrates (e.g., about 1.82% versus about 2.94%) when V1 dielectric (FSG) thickness was about 300-400 angstroms thicker than a target thickness. Average resistance of the short via chain was reduced slightly (about 2.64%) by a combination of feedback and feedforward controls.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
- Internal Circuitry In Semiconductor Integrated Circuit Devices (AREA)
Abstract
A first system is provided that is configured to pattern a substrate that includes (1) a lithography subsystem configured to form a patterned masking layer on the substrate; and (2) an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after the patterned masking layer has been formed thereon and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and (3) a controller coupled to the lithography subsystem and the etch subsystem. The controller includes computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and adjusting a stepper focus of the lithography subsystem during formation of a subsequent patterned masking layer based at least in part on the information received from the etch subsystem.
Description
- This application claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/440,898, filed Jan. 16, 2003 and is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/459,194, filed Jun. 11, 2003, which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/387,835, filed Jun. 11, 2002. All of the above listed patent applications are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
- This application is related to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/323,065, filed Sep. 18, 2001 and titled “INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SET FOR FORMING AN INTERCONNECT ON A SUBSTRATE”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- This application also is related to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/333,901, filed Nov. 28, 2001 and titled “INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SET FOR FORMING SHALLOW TRENCH ISOLATION REGIONS”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- The present invention relates to semiconductor device manufacturing, and more specifically to an integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate.
- A typical integrated circuit contains a plurality of metal pathways that provide electrical power for powering the various semiconductor devices forming the integrated circuit, and that allow these semiconductor devices to share/exchange electrical information. Within integrated circuits, metal layers are stacked on top of one another by using intermetal or “interlayer” dielectrics that insulate the metal layers from each other.
- Generally, each metal layer must form electrical contact to at least one additional metal layer. Such metal-layer-to-metal-layer electrical contact is achieved by etching a hole (i.e., a via) in the interlayer dielectric that separates the metal layers, and by filling the resulting via with a metal to create an interconnect as described further below. Metal layers typically occupy etched pathways or “lines” in the interlayer dielectric. When copper metal layers and copper interconnects are employed, because copper atoms are highly mobile in silicon dioxide and may create electrical defects in silicon, the copper metal layers and interconnect vias conventionally are encapsulated with a barrier material (e.g., to prevent copper atoms from creating leakage paths in silicon dioxide interlayers and/or defects in the silicon substrate on which the metal layers and interconnects are formed).
- As is well known, an increase in device performance is typically accompanied by a decrease in device area or an increase in device density. An increase in device density requires a decrease in the via and line dimensions used to form interconnects (e.g., a larger depth-to-width ratio or a larger “aspect ratio”). Decreased via and line dimensions require tighter control over the etching process used to form each via or line, the deposition process or processes used to fill each via or line and the planarization process employed thereafter.
- Another technique for improving device performance is to decrease the RC time constant associated with the metal layers employed by a semiconductor device. This may be performed, for example, by using low resistivity metal layers (e.g., copper metal layers rather than aluminum metal layers) and/or low k interlayer dielectrics (e.g., carbon doped oxide or silicon carbon interlayer dielectrics rather than silicon dioxide interlayer dielectrics). Interconnects which employ low K interlayer dielectrics are referred to herein as “low K dielectric interconnects”.
- Many conventional interconnect formation techniques rely on the use of “process windows”. A process window is an estimated range of one or more parameters that typically result for a given process (e.g., an estimated range of via or line depths and/or widths that typically result for a given etch process, an estimated range of film thicknesses that typically result for a given deposition process, etc.). Accordingly, when process windows are employed, vias and lines typically are overetched to ensure that all interlayer material to be removed is removed, vias and lines typically are overfilled to ensure that the deepest or widest vias and lines are adequately filled, and substrates typically are overpolished during planarization to ensure that planarization is complete. The use of process windows thereby reduces device uniformity (due to the inherent inaccuracy of using predicted/estimated via/line dimensions, deposited film thicknesses, etc.) and decreases throughput (due to overprocessing).
- To ensure that each process step used during interconnect formation (e.g., low K dielectric layer deposition, etching, barrier/seed layer deposition, electroplating, planarization, etc.) maintains its proper process window, “test” substrates may be periodically analyzed following each interconnect process step. For example, following an etch process, a test substrate may be analyzed within a stand alone metrology tool that measures via and/or line depth, width, profile, uniformity across a substrate or the like. Similarly, a stand alone metrology tool may be employed to measure deposited film thickness, and stand alone defect detection tools may be used to measure defect levels following etching, deposition and planarization. In this manner, if etched dimensions and/or deposited film thicknesses are outside of a required process window, or if too many defects result following etching, deposition and/or planarization, appropriate corrective measures may be taken so that each interconnect process (e.g., etching, deposition and/or planarization) produces results within its required process window.
- The use of test substrates results in at least one major drawback. Namely, due to the time required to examine and analyze each test substrate following etching, deposition or planarization, such test wafers may only be employed periodically without significantly affecting the throughput of the various semiconductor processing tools used during interconnect formation (e.g., etching tools, deposition tools, planarization tools, etc.). Numerous substrates thereby may be processed using out of specification process windows before the out of specification process windows are identified with test substrates. High scrap costs result.
- The need for more automated, direct control over semiconductor device fabrication processes has been previously recognized. For example, J. Baliga, “Advanced Process Control: Soon to be a Must”, Semiconductor International, pp.1-10 (July 1999) discusses potential benefits of employing advanced process control (APC) during semiconductor device manufacturing. However, as this article describes, the conventional use of APC has been (1) limited to only a few areas (e.g., chemical mechanical planarization (CMP), lithography, etc.); (2) limited to relatively simple applications (e.g., CMP, lithography, etc.); and (3) employed primarily at a process level (e.g., feedback for a single process), not at a system level (e.g., not at a level that affects numerous sequential processing steps such as those employed during interconnect formation). APC has not been used at a level that affects numerous processes and also that depends on the coordination of a number of discreet subsystems and technologies. Conventional APC techniques have had little, if any, affect on overall interconnect formation strategies; and the use of test substrates and process windows during interconnect formation remains widespread.
- Accordingly, a need exists for improved methods and apparatus for forming interconnects on a substrate, particularly high performance, low K dielectric interconnects.
- In a first aspect of the invention, a first system is provided that is configured to pattern a substrate. The first system includes (1) a lithography subsystem configured to form a patterned masking layer on the substrate; and (2) an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after the patterned masking layer has been formed thereon and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and (3) a controller coupled to the lithography subsystem and the etch subsystem.
- The controller includes computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of (a) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and (b) adjusting a stepper focus of the lithography subsystem during formation of a subsequent patterned masking layer based at least in part on the information received from the etch subsystem.
- In a second aspect of the invention, a second system is provided that is configured to pattern a substrate. The second system includes (1) a low K dielectric deposition subsystem configured to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate, the low K dielectric deposition subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; (2) an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after one or more low K dielectric layers have been deposited on the substrate and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features in the one or more low K dielectric layers formed on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and (3) a controller coupled to the low K dielectric deposition subsystem and the etch subsystem.
- The controller includes computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of (1) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (2) determining an etch process to perform within the etch subsystem based at least in part on the information received from the inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (3) directing the etch subsystem to etch at least one low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the etch process; (4) receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and (5) adjusting etching of the substrate in real-time based on the information received from the etch subsystem.
- Numerous other systems, methods, computer program products and data structures also are provided. Each computer program product described herein may be carried by a medium readable by a computer (e.g., a carrier wave signal, a floppy disc, a compact disc, a DVD, a hard drive, a random access memory, etc.).
- In another aspect of the invention, a system for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate is provided that includes (1) means for receiving information about a substrate processed within a low K dielectric deposition subsystem from an integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; (2) means for determining an etch process to perform within an etch subsystem based at least in part on the information received from the inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem; and (3) means for directing the etch subsystem to etch at least one low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the etch process and based on real-time feedback information from the etch subsystem. Other features and aspects of the present invention will become more fully apparent from the following detailed description, the appended claims and the accompanying drawings.
- FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of an inventive system for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 1B illustrates an alternative embodiment for the system of FIG. 1A wherein the module controller is “distributed” among the tools of the system;
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary embodiment of the module controller of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 3 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the low K dielectric deposition tool of FIG. 1A or1B;
- FIG. 4A is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the etch tool of FIG. 1A or1B;
- FIG. 4B is a top plan view of an exemplary etch and clean tool that may be employed within the inventive system of FIG. 1A or1B;
- FIG. 5 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool of FIGS. 1A and/or1B;
- FIG. 6 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the electroplating tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 7A is a top plan view of a first exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIG. 7B is a top plan view of a second exemplary embodiment of the planarization tool of FIGS. 1A and 1B;
- FIGS.8A-P illustrate a flowchart of an exemplary process for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention;
- FIGS.9A-L illustrate cross sectional views of a semiconductor substrate during the process of FIGS. 8A-P;
- FIG. 10A is a table of exemplary process parameters of a low K dielectric deposition tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 10B(1) and FIG. 10B(2) are a table of exemplary process parameters of an etch tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 10C is a table of exemplary process parameters of a barrier/seed layer deposition tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 10D is a table of exemplary process parameters of an electroplating tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 10E is a table of exemplary process parameters of a planarization tool that may be adjusted based on feedforward and/or feedback information in accordance with the present invention;
- FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a first exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention;
- FIGS.12A-B are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a second exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention;
- FIGS.13A-B are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a third exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention;
- FIGS.14A-C are cross-sectional views of a semiconductor substrate useful in describing a fourth exemplary interconnect formation process in accordance with the present invention; and
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a two level metal Cu/Low K interconnect formed in accordance with the present invention.
- The present invention provides integrated methods, apparatus, systems, data structures and computer program products for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate. The substrate may be a semiconductor substrate (e.g., a semiconductor wafer) or any other suitable substrate such as a glass plate for flat panel displays.
- In one aspect of the invention, a novel system is provided that includes a dielectric deposition subsystem and having an integrated inspection system, an etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system, a subsystem capable of depositing both a barrier layer and a seed layer (hereinafter a “barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem”) and having an integrated inspection system, an electroplating subsystem having an integrated inspection system, a planarization subsystem having an integrated inspection system and a module controller for controlling low K dielectric interconnect formation via these subsystems. Each integrated inspection system is capable of performing defect detection (e.g., to detect defect density on a surface of a substrate before and/or after a processing step) and/or metrology (e.g., to measure etch features, deposited layer thicknesses, surface planarity, etc., before and/or after a processing step).
- To form a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate, the substrate is delivered to the inventive system and is transferred to the low K dielectric deposition subsystem. Based at least in part on feedback information regarding a low K interlayer dielectric previously deposited within the low K dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., thickness, defect density, etc., of one or more low K dielectrics that form the low K interlayer dielectric), the module controller may determine a low K dielectric deposition process (or processes) to perform within the low K dielectric deposition chamber. The module controller then directs the low K dielectric deposition subsystem to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate so as to form a low K interlayer dielectric. For example, one or more of an oxide layer, a carbon doped oxide layer and a silicon carbon layer (with or without nitrogen or other impurities) may be deposited on the substrate within the low K dielectric deposition subsystem to form the low K interlayer dielectric.
- Once the low K interlayer dielectric has been formed on the substrate, the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., to determine overall thickness of the low K interlayer dielectric and/or the thickness of the individual layers which form the low K interlayer dielectric, defect density, etc.) and inspection information is communicated to the module controller. The substrate then is transferred to a conventional lithography tool, and a masking layer is formed thereon and is patterned as is know in the art (e.g., to form a patterned masking layer). The substrate then is transferred to the etch subsystem.
- Within the etch subsystem, the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem may perform defect detect on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the substrate does not have too high of a defect density) and/or metrology on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the patterned masking layer has been properly formed/patterned as required to define interconnect regions or features in the low K interlayer dielectric following etching). Based at least in part on feedforward information about the substrate such as defect density, low K interlayer dielectric thickness, thickness of the various layers which comprise the low K interlayer dielectric or patterned masking layer density/dimension/profile, the module controller may determine an etch process to perform within the etch subsystem. The etch process also may be determined based at least in part on other information such as information received from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem for a substrate previously etched within the etch subsystem (e.g., feedback information such as interconnect feature density/dimensions/profile, defect density, etc., following an etch process). The module controller then directs the etch subsystem to perform the determined etch process (e.g., so as to etch the desired via and/or line features within the low K interlayer dielectric of the substrate).
- Once the substrate has been etched (and the patterned masking layer has been removed as described below), the substrate is again inspected within the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem to determine interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile information, defect density, etc., and this information is communicated to the module controller. The above described lithography and etch steps may need to be performed multiple times (e.g., to form lines and vias in a dual damascene structure). One or more cleaning and/or annealing steps also may be employed. Thereafter, the substrate is transferred to the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., after a cleaning step and annealing step as described below).
- Within the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem, the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem may perform defect detection on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the substrate does not have too high of a defect density following cleaning and annealing) and/or metrology on the substrate (e.g., to ensure that the interconnect features have been properly formed/patterned and/or to determine interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile if not previously determined by the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem).
- Based at least in part on feedforward information about the substrate such as defect density or interconnect feature density/dimensions/profile, the module controller may determine a barrier layer deposition process and a seed layer deposition process to perform within the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem. The barrier and/or seed layer deposition processes also may be determined based at least in part on other information such as information received from the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem for a substrate previously processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., feedback information such as barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, defect density, etc., for a previously processed substrate). The module controller then directs the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem to perform the determined deposition process or processes (e.g., so as to deposit a barrier layer and a seed layer on the substrate).
- Once the barrier layer and the seed layer have been deposited on the substrate, the substrate is inspected within the integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem to determine deposited layer thicknesses (e.g., the thickness of the deposited barrier layer and/or of the deposited seed layer), defect density, etc., and this information is communicated to the module controller. Thereafter, the substrate is transferred to the electroplating subsystem and a fill layer is deposited on the substrate (e.g., so as to fill remaining portions of vias and trenches to form the conductive lines and plugs of the interconnect features).
- To deposit the fill layer, the module controller determines and directs the electroplating subsystem to employ an electroplating process. The electroplating process may be based at least in part on dimension and/or profile information regarding the interconnect features present on the substrate (previously measured for the substrate by the integrated inspection system of the etch or the barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem). The electroplating process also may be based at least in part on information obtained from the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem for a substrate previously processed within the electroplating subsystem (e.g., information such as fill layer thickness, defect density, etc., for a previously processed substrate). The electroplating process also may be based at least in part on information gathered by the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem prior to processing.
- Once the fill layer has been deposited on the substrate, the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem (e.g., to determine fill layer thickness, defect density, etc.), and inspection information is communicated to the module controller. The substrate then is transferred to the planarization subsystem and is planarized.
- To planarize the substrate, the module controller determines and directs the planarization subsystem to employ a planarization process that may be based at least in part on the thickness of the fill layer deposited on the substrate as obtained from the integrated inspection system of the electroplating subsystem and/or that may be based at least in part on information obtained from the integrated inspection system of the planarization subsystem for a substrate previously processed therein (e.g., information such as defect density, surface planarity following planarization, etc.) or for the incoming substrate itself. Once the substrate has been planarized, the substrate is inspected with the integrated inspection system of the planarization subsystem (e.g., to determine defect density, surface planarity, etc.), and this inspection information is communicated to the module controller.
- Numerous other aspects of the invention also are provided. The module “controller” may be a single, central controller that communicates with the integrated inspection system of each subsystem, or each subsystem may include controller capabilities (e.g., the module controller may be distributed among the subsystems such that each subsystem has a controller that communicates with one or more other subsystem controllers). In at least one embodiment, each subsystem includes an embedded module controller and an automated process control module (e.g., computer program code) that may communicate with the integrated inspection system of the subsystem and with embedded module controllers of other subsystems, determine processes to perform within the subsystem based at least in part on feedback information (e.g., from the integrated inspection system of the subsystem) and/or feedforward information (e.g., from an embedded module controller of another subsystem), etc., as described in more detail below.
- Because during interconnect formation, each process performed (e.g., low K dielectric layer deposition, etching, barrier/seed layer deposition, electroplating, planarization, etc.) may be based at least in part on feedforward information (e.g., patterned masking layer density, interconnect feature density/dimension/profile, defect density, deposited layer thickness, etc., for the substrate to be processed) and/or based at least in part on feedback information (e.g., defect density, interconnect feature dimensions/profile, deposited layer thickness, etc., for a substrate previously processed), the use of “estimated” process windows during low K dielectric interconnect formation may be reduced, and the accuracy and repeatability of each process step may be significantly increased. Additionally, the integrated nature of each inspection system allows substrates to be inspected without significantly affecting subsystem throughput (e.g., every substrate processed may be inspected). One or more stand alone inspection systems may be used in addition to or in place of one or more of the integrated inspection systems.
- As used herein, an integrated inspection system refers to an inspection system that is (1) coupled to a fabrication subsystem; and (2) capable of inspecting one substrate of a batch of substrates delivered to the fabrication subsystem during at least a portion of the time that another substrate of the batch of substrates is processed within the fabrication subsystem. A fabrication subsystem may include any known semiconductor device fabrication tool, system or subsystem such as an etch tool, a deposition tool, a cleaning tool, an oxidation tool, a planarization tool or the like. A stand alone inspection system refers to an inspection system that is (1) not coupled to a fabrication subsystem; and/or (2) incapable of inspecting one substrate of a batch of substrates delivered to the fabrication subsystem during at least a portion of the time that another substrate of the batch of substrates is processed within the fabrication subsystem.
- An inspection system refers to a system capable of performing defect detection or metrology. Defect detection refers to the detection, identification and/or classification of defects, contaminants, flaws, imperfections, deficiencies or the like. Metrology refers to the determination of one or more material or process parameters such as thickness, composition, index of refraction, atomic structure, mechanical properties, electrical properties, dimension, profile, gas pressure, process temperature, gas flow rates, pump rate or the like.
- Determining may include selecting, calculating, computing, defining, delineating, measuring or the like. Directing may include applying, initiating, controlling, managing, assisting or the like. Configured to or adapted to may include formed to, designed to, selected to, constructed to, manufactured to, programmed to or the like. Communication may include one or two way communication, polling, or the like. Feedback information refers to information regarding a substrate (e.g., defect density, material properties such as trench depth, trench width, trench profile, thickness, etc.) that is relevant to at least the processing of a subsequent substrate. Feedforward information refers to information regarding a substrate that is relevant to at least the subsequent processing of the same substrate.
- FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of an
inventive system 100 for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention. With reference to FIG. 1A, theinventive system 100 includes a low K dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., low K dielectric deposition tool 102), alithography tool 104, an etch subsystem (e.g., etch tool 106), acleaning tool 108, anannealing furnace 110, a barrier/seed layer deposition subsystem (e.g., barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112), an electroplating subsystem (e.g., electroplating tool 114), and a planarization subsystem (e.g., planarization tool 116) each located at least partially within aclean room 118. Eachtool 102 through 116 is in communication with amodule controller 120 which is in turn in communication with a fabrication (FAB) host/controller (referred to as FAB controller 122), both described in more detail below. One or more of the tools 102-116 also may be in communication withFAB controller 122. More than one module or FAB controller also may be employed, as may additional/redundant processing tools (e.g., additional/redundant low K dielectric deposition tools, lithography tools, etch tools, cleaning tools, annealing furnaces, barrier/seed layer deposition tools, electroplating tools, and planarization tools). - The low K
dielectric deposition tool 102 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing low K dielectric materials on a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102. One exemplary embodiment of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 is described below with reference to FIG. 3. - The
lithography tool 104 may comprise any apparatus capable of forming a patterned masking layer used to define vias, lines or other interconnect features during low K dielectric interconnect formation on a substrate. For example, thelithography tool 104 may include an FSI P2500 system manufactured by FSI International, Inc. for depositing an anti-reflection coating (such as a bottom anti-reflection coating (BARC) layer) and/or a photoresist layer, a DNS-80B system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for forming a uniform photoresist layer over the surface of a substrate, an ASML-5500/90 photoresist exposure system manufactured by ASM Lithography Inc. for exposing a photoresist layer to a desired mask pattern, and a DNS system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for developing the exposed photoresist layer (thereby forming the desired patterned masking layer). Such lithography tools are well known in the art; and any other conventional lithography tool may be similarly employed. - The
etch tool 106 may comprise any apparatus capable of etching low K dielectric materials deposited within the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102, and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates etched within theetch tool 106. Exemplary embodiments of theetch tool 106 are described below with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B. - The
cleaning tool 108 may comprise any conventional apparatus for cleaning a substrate such as a wet chemical cleaning station that employs appropriate solvents and/or other chemicals, deionized (DI) water rinsing, Marangoni drying, megasonic techniques and/or any combination thereof to clean a single substrate or a batch of substrates. For example, thecleaning tool 108 may comprise a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion. Any other conventional cleaning tool may be similarly employed. - The
annealing furnace 110 may comprise any conventional apparatus for annealing a substrate. For example, theannealing furnace 110 may comprise a Canary furnace manufactured by Canary. Any other conventional annealing system may be similarly employed. - The barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing a barrier layer and a seed layer on a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. One exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112 is described below with reference to FIG. 5. - The
electroplating tool 114 may comprise any apparatus capable of depositing a filler layer (e.g., copper or some other metal) within an innerconnect feature of a substrate and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within theelectroplating tool 114. One exemplary embodiment of theelectroplating tool 114 is described below with reference to FIG. 6. - The
planarization tool 116 may comprise any apparatus capable of planarizing a substrate following deposition of a filler layer on the substrate via theelectroplating tool 114 and that includes an integrated inspection system for inspecting substrates processed within theplanarization tool 116. Exemplary embodiments of theplanarization tool 116 are described below with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B. - The
clean room 118 may comprise any suitable clean room facility such as a class one clean room. The tools 102-116 need not be located within the same clean room. For example, because a planarization tool may be a significant contamination source (e.g., due to the nature of chemical mechanical polishing), it may be preferable to employ a separate clean room for interfacing with theplanarization tool 116. Substrates may be transferred between the two clean rooms via any conventional mechanism (e.g., via a technician, a conveyor system, an automated guided vehicle, etc.). Such clean rooms may be of different classes. - The
FAB controller 122 may comprise any conventional fabrication controller, fabrication host, or manufacturing execution system (MES) capable of administering process flow among a plurality of processing tools (as is known in the art), but that is configured to communicate with themodule controller 120 for receiving information therefrom (as described further below). TheFAB controller 122, for example, may monitor wafer lots or lot numbers, work in progress, equipment quality, module quality, perform wafer/lot dispatching and document management, etc., and may be implemented as hardware, software or a combination thereof. - Note that in the embodiment of FIG. 1A, the
module controller 120 is illustrated as a “central” controller that may communicate with at least thetools system 100 wherein themodule controller 120 is “distributed” among thetools tools module module controller 120 to provide feedforward and/or feedback information to themodule controller 120, to receive processes from themodule controller 120, etc. The EMC's 102 a, 106 a and 112 a-116 a and theAPC modules - FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary embodiment of the
module controller 120 of FIGS. 1A and/or 1B. Themodule controller 120 may be implemented as a system controller, as a dedicated hardware circuit, as an appropriately programmed general purpose computer, or as any other equivalent electronic, mechanical or electro-mechanical device. - With reference to FIG. 2 the
module controller 120 comprises aprocessor 202, such as one or more conventional microprocessors (e.g., one or more Intel® Pentium® processors). Theprocessor 202 is in communication with acommunication port 204 through which theprocessor 202 communicates with other devices (e.g., with tools 102-116, with the EMC's 102 a, 106 a and 112 a-116 a, with theFAB controller 122 and/or with any other relevant device). Thecommunication port 204 may include multiple communication channels for simultaneous communication with, for example, the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102, theetch tool 106, the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112, theelectroplating tool 114, theplanarization tool 116, the EMC's 102 a, 106 a and 112 a-116 a, theFAB controller 122 and/or any other relevant device (e.g., thelithography tool 104, thecleaning tool 108, theannealing furnace 110, etc.). - Those skilled in the art will understand that devices in communication with each other need only be “capable of” communicating with each other and need not be continually transmitting data to or receiving data from each other. On the contrary, such devices need only transmit data to or receive data from each other as necessary, and may actually refrain from exchanging data most the time. Further, devices may be in communication even though steps may be required to establish a communication link.
- The
processor 202 also is in communication with adata storage device 206. Thedata storage device 206 may comprise an appropriate combination of magnetic, optical and/or semiconductor memory, and may include, for example, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), a compact disk, a floppy disk, a DVD, a hard disk, or any other storage medium. Theprocessor 202 and thedata storage device 206 each may be, for example, located entirely within a single computer or other computing device, or connected to each other by a communication medium, such as a serial port cable, a telephone line or a radio frequency transceiver. Alternatively, themodule controller 120 may comprise one or more computers that are connected to a remote server computer (not shown). - In the exemplary embodiment of the
module controller 120 shown in FIG. 2, thedata storage device 206 may store, for example, (i) a program 208 (e.g., computer program code and/or a computer program product) adapted to direct theprocessor 202 in accordance with the present invention, and particularly in accordance with one or more of the processes described in detail below; and (ii) adatabase 210 adapted to store various information employed by themodule controller 120 such as process recipes for one or more of the tools 102-116, algorithms for controlling the operation of one or more of the tools 102-116 based on feedforward and/or feedback information as described further below, and/or any other relevant information (e.g. system status, processing conditions, process models, substrate history, metrology and/or defect data for each substrate, etc.). Note that rather than employing adatabase 210 to store process recipes, algorithms or the like, such information may be hard coded in theprogram 208. - The
program 208 may be stored in a compressed, an uncompiled and/or an encrypted format, and may include computer program code that allows themodule controller 120 to: - 1. determine a low K dielectric deposition process to perform on a substrate within the low K dielectric deposition tool102 (e.g., based on information about a substrate previously processed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102);
- 2. direct the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102 to deposit a low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the low K dielectric deposition process; - 3. receive information about the deposited low K dielectric layer from an integrated inspection system of the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102; - 4. determine an etch process to perform on a substrate within the etch tool106 (e.g., based on information about the substrate such as masking layer pattern density/dimensions/profile, thickness of the low K interlayer dielectric deposited on the substrate within the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102, etc., based on information about a substrate previously processed within theetch tool 106, etc.); - 5. direct the
etch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process; - 6. receive information about the etched substrate from an integrated inspection system of the
etch tool 106; - 7. determine a cleaning process to perform on a substrate within the
cleaning tool 108; - 8. direct the
cleaning tool 108 to clean the substrate based on the cleaning process; - 9. determine an annealing process to perform on a substrate within the
annealing furnace 110; - 10. direct the annealing furnace to anneal the substrate based on the annealing process;
- 11. determine a barrier layer deposition process to perform on a substrate within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool112 (e.g., based on information about the substrate such as interconnect feature density, dimensions and/or profile, based on information about a substrate previously processed within the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112, etc.); - 12. direct the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 to deposit a barrier layer on the substrate based on the barrier layer deposition process; - 13. receive information about the deposited barrier layer from an integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112; - 14. determine a seed layer deposition process to perform on a substrate within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool112 (e.g., based on information about the substrate such as interconnect feature density, dimensions and/or profile, based on information about a substrate previously processed within the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112, etc.); - 15. direct the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 to deposit a seed layer on the substrate based on the seed layer deposition process; - 16. receive information about the deposited seed layer from an integrated inspection system of the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112; - 17. determine an electroplating process to perform on a substrate within the electroplating tool114 (e.g., based on information received from the inspection system of the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 about interconnect features of the substrate and/or a barrier layer and/or a seed layer deposited on the substrate, based on information regarding a substrate previously processed within theelectroplating tool 114, etc.); - 18. direct the
electroplating tool 114 to deposit a fill layer on the substrate based on the electroplating process (e.g., to fill the interconnect features of the substrate); - 19. receive information about the fill layer deposited on the substrate from an integrated inspection system of the
electroplating tool 114; - 20. determine a planarization process to perform on a substrate within the planarization tool116 (e.g., based on information received from the inspection system of the
electroplating tool 114 about a deposited fill layer, based on information obtained regarding a substrate previously processed within theplanarization tool 116, etc.); - 21. direct the
planarization tool 116 to planarize the substrate based on the planarization process; and/or - 22. receive information from an integrated inspection system of the
planarization tool 116 regarding the substrate. - Numerous additional functions and/or processes may be performed via the
module controller 120 as described further below. Themodule controller 120 may include any peripheral devices (e.g., keyboards, computer displays, pointing devices, etc., represented generally as input/output device 212) required to implement the above functionality. - Note that instructions of the
program 208 may be read into a main memory (not shown) of theprocessor 202 from a computer readable medium other than thedata storage device 206 such as from a ROM or from a RAM. While execution of sequences of instructions in theprogram 208 causes theprocessor 202 to perform the process steps described herein, hardwired circuitry may be used in place of, or in combination with, software instructions for implementation of the processes of the present invention. Thus, embodiments of the present invention are not limited to any specific combination of hardware and software. The EMC's 102 a, 106 a and 112 a-116 a and/or theAPC modules module controller 120. - FIG. 3 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102 of FIG. 1A or 1B. With reference to FIG. 3, the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 comprises aprocessing tool 302 coupled to afactory interface 304 via loadlocks 306 a, 306 b. Theprocessing tool 302 includes atransfer chamber 308 which houses a dualblade substrate handler 310. Thetransfer chamber 308 is coupled to loadlocks 306 a, 306 b, afirst set 312 of low Kdielectric deposition chambers second set 316 of low Kdielectric deposition chambers third set 320 of anti-reflectioncoating deposition chambers module controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber. - Loadlock chambers306 a-b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the
factory interface 304 to thetransfer chamber 308. The low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a-b, 318 a-b may comprise any conventional processing chambers capable of depositing low K dielectrics on a substrate. The anti-reflection coating deposition chambers 322 a-b, if employed, may include any conventional processing chambers capable of deposition anti-reflection coatings on a substrate (e.g., for lithographic purposes). In at least one embodiment of the invention, theprocessing tool 302 is a Producer® low K dielectric deposition tool (based on a Producer™ platform) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other low K dielectric deposition system may be similarly employed. - The
factory interface 304 includes abuffer chamber 324 which houses afirst substrate handler 326 a and asecond substrate handler 326 b and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 328 a-b. It will be understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within thebuffer chamber 324, and that any number of loadports may be coupled to thebuffer chamber 324. - As shown in FIG. 3, the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102 includes anintegrated inspection system 330. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 3, theintegrated inspection system 330 includes one or moredefect detection tools metrology tool 334 coupled to and located within, respectively, thebuffer chamber 324 of thefactory interface 304. Alternatively, theintegrated inspection system 330 may include only one of thedefect detection tools defect detection tools metrology tool 334 may be coupled to theprocessing tool 302 rather than to the factory interface 304 (e.g., by coupling thedefect detection tools metrology tool 334 adjacent the loadlocks 306 a, 306 b). - The
defect detection tools defect detection tools defect detection tools defect detection tools EMC 106 a of the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 334 may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the thickness, thickness uniformity, refractive index, other film properties, or other relevant information for one or more low K dielectric layers. In at least one embodiment of the invention, themetrology tool 334 comprises a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics. Other metrology tools also may be employed. - The
metrology tool 334 also may be configured to inspect a substrate after processing within any of thesets sets - In operation, two cassettes or “carriers” of substrates are delivered to the
factory interface 304 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102. In particular, the substrate carriers are delivered to the loadports 328 a-b. Each loadport 328 a-b may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers. Once the substrate carriers have been loaded into the appropriate loadport 328 a-b of thefactory interface 304, thefirst substrate handler 326 a retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier loaded into the loadport 328 a and transfers the substrate to thefirst loadlock 306 a. Thesecond substrate handler 326 b also retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier loaded into theloadport 328 b and transfers the substrate to thesecond loadlock 306 b. - Thereafter the
substrate handler 310 of theprocessing tool 302 retrieves the substrate from thefirst loadlock 306 a and the substrate from thesecond loadlock 306 b and transfers the substrates to the (first) low Kdielectric deposition chambers dielectric deposition chambers - Following deposition within the low K
dielectric deposition chambers dielectric deposition chambers dielectric deposition chambers - Following deposition within the low K
dielectric deposition chambers coating deposition chambers coating deposition chambers - Thereafter, the substrates are transferred to first and
second loadlocks first substrate handler 326 a of thefactory interface 304 retrieves the substrate from thefirst loadlock 306 a and transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 332 a and themetrology tool 334. Thesecond substrate handler 326 a of thefactory interface 304 retrieves the substrate from thesecond loadlock 306 b and transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 332 b and themetrology tool 334. Assuming each substrate is first transferred to a defect detection tool, thedefect detection tool 332 a performs defect detection on the substrate it receives from thefirst loadlock 306 a (e.g., to determine the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identify or otherwise characterize defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thedefect detection tool 332 b similarly performs defect detection on the substrate it receives from thesecond loadlock 306 b (e.g., to determine the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identify or otherwise characterize defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Each substrate is then inspected with the metrology tool 334 (e.g., after transfer from thedefect detection tool metrology tool 334 via thesubstrate handler defect detection tools metrology tool 334. - The
metrology tool 334 analyzes the substrate to determine such information as the thickness, thickness uniformity, refractive index, other film properties or other relevant information for one or more low K dielectric layers deposited within theprocessing tool 302. Themetrology tool 334 similarly may determine such information for any anti-reflection coating formed within theprocessing tool 302. Themetrology tool 334 provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 102 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler factory interface 304 retrieves each substrate inspected by themetrology tool 334 and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 328 a-b). - It will be understood that more than two substrates may be processed at a time within the low K
dielectric deposition tool 102. For example, while two substrates are being processed within thefirst set 312 of low Kdielectric deposition chambers second set 316 of low Kdielectric deposition chambers third set 320 of anti-reflectioncoating deposition chambers defect detection tools metrology tool 334 on other substrates. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of thedefect detection tools metrology tool 334, defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102. Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (if desired). Further, substrates may be inspected via thedefect detection tools metrology tool 334 before being processed within one of the chambers 314 a-332 b. - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 102 a also may comprise such computer program code. - FIG. 4A is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the
etch tool 106 of FIGS. 1A or 1B. With reference to FIG. 4A, theetch tool 106 comprises aprocessing tool 402 coupled to afactory interface 404. Theprocessing tool 402 includes atransfer chamber 406 which houses afirst substrate handler 408. Thetransfer chamber 406 is coupled to afirst loadlock 410 a, asecond loadlock 410 b, afirst etch chamber 412 a, asecond etch chamber 412 b, athird etch chamber 412 c, afourth etch chamber 412 d, a firstauxiliary processing chamber 414 a and a secondauxiliary processing chamber 414 b. Fewer or more etch chambers or auxiliary processing chambers may be employed, and themodule controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber. - Loadlock chambers410 a-b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the
factory interface 404 to thetransfer chamber 406. The etch chambers 412 a-d may comprise any conventional processing chambers capable of etching low K dielectrics formed on a substrate (e.g., eMax chambers manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.). The auxiliary processing chambers 414 a-b, if employed, may include, for example, cooldown chambers, substrate orientors, degas chambers, inspections chambers, ashing chambers or the like. In at least one embodiment of the invention, theprocessing tool 402 is a Centura® Dielectric Etch and Strip tool (based on a Centura™ platform) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other etching system may be similarly employed. - The
factory interface 404 includes abuffer chamber 416 which houses asecond substrate handler 418 and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 420 a-d. It will be understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within thebuffer chamber 416, and that any number of loadports may be coupled to thebuffer chamber 416. - As shown in FIG. 4A, the
etch tool 106 includes anintegrated inspection system 422. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 4A, theintegrated inspection system 422 includes adefect detection tool 424 a and ametrology tool 424 b both coupled to thebuffer chamber 416 of thefactory interface 404. Alternatively, theintegrated inspection system 422 may include only one of thedefect detection tool 424 a and themetrology tool 424 b, or may be coupled to theprocessing tool 402 rather than to the factory interface 404 (e.g., by coupling thedefect detection tool 424 a and/or themetrology tool 424 b to thetransfer chamber 406 such as at the location of one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 414 a-b). - The
defect detection tool 424 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting and/or characterizing defects on a surface of a substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thedefect detection tool 424 a comprises the Excite™ or IPM™ defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998. Thedefect detection tool 424 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization and/or classification information. The defect detection tool 424 may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 106 a of the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 424 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring via and/or line depth, width, profile, and/or other critical dimension information. In at least one embodiment of the invention, themetrology tool 424 b comprises a laser based metrology tool wherein laser light is scattered off of a substrate surface and analyzed to determine via/line depth, via/line profile, via/line width and/or other critical dimension information as is known in the art. - The
metrology tool 424 b also may be configured to inspect a substrate prior to etching so as to determine the density of a patterned masking layer used to define vias or lines formed in a low K dielectric material. Themetrology tool 424 b can then provide information regarding the patterned masking layer to themodule controller 120, and based on this information themodule controller 120 may determine an appropriate etch process (e.g., a “baseline” etch process selected from a plurality of etch processes stored by the module controller 120) for the substrate as described further below. In the embodiment of FIG. 1B, theEMC 106 a additionally or alternatively may perform such functions. - In operation, a cassette or carrier of substrates is delivered to the
factory interface 404 of theetch tool 106. In particular, the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 420 a-d. Each loadport 420 a-d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers. Once the substrate carrier has been loaded into the appropriate loadport 420 a-d of thefactory interface 404, thesubstrate handler 418 retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to thefirst loadlock 410 a. Thereafter thesubstrate handler 408 of theprocessing tool 402 retrieves the substrate from thefirst loadlock 410 a and transfers the substrate to one of the etch chambers 412 a-d. The substrate is then etched within the etch chamber (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and is transferred to thesecond loadlock 410 b. A patterned masking layer formed on the substrate (e.g., a patterned photoresist layer) used to define vias and/or lines during etching also may be removed within the etch chamber or within a separate etch chamber (as described below) before the substrate is transferred to thesecond loadlock 410 b. An auxiliary ashing chamber (not shown) similarly may be used to remove the patterned masking layer. Prior to etching within the etch chamber and/or after etching within the etch chamber the substrate may be processed within one or both of the auxiliary processing chambers 414 a-b (e.g., for substrate orientation purposes, for degassing, for cooldown, etc.). - The
substrate handler 418 of thefactory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from thesecond loadlock 410 b and transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 424 a and themetrology tool 424 b. Assuming the substrate is first transferred to thedefect detection tool 424 a, thedefect detection tool 424 a performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 106 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 418 of thefactory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from thedefect detection tool 424 a and transfers the substrate to themetrology tool 424 b. - The
metrology tool 424 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as via/line depth, via/line width, via/line profile and/or other critical dimension information. Themetrology tool 424 b then provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 106 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 418 of thefactory interface 404 retrieves the substrate from themetrology tool 424 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 420 a-d). - It will be understood that more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the
etch tool 106. For example, while one substrate is being processed within theetch chamber 412 a, up to three other substrates may be simultaneously processed within theetch chambers 412 b-d. Likewise, substrates may be processed within the etch chambers 412 a-d while defect detection is performed within thedefect detection tool 424 a or while metrology is performed within themetrology tool 424 b on a different substrate. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of thedefect detection tool 424 a and themetrology tool 424 b, defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of theetch tool 106. Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the etch tool 106 (if desired). Further, substrates may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 424 a and/or themetrology tool 424 b before being processed within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d. - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 106 a also may comprise such computer program code. - In at least one embodiment of the invention, the
cleaning tool 108 may be part of an etch tool, and may share use of the integrated inspection system of the etch tool. FIG. 4B is a top plan view of an exemplary etch andclean tool 106′ that may be employed within the inventive system of FIG. 1A or 1B. The etch andclean tool 106′ is similar to theetch tool 106 of FIG. 4A, but includes anadditional buffer chamber 426 having asubstrate handler 428 disposed therein, and two cleaningchambers buffer chamber 426. Eachcleaning chamber - FIG. 5 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 of FIGS. 1A and/or 1B. With reference to FIG. 5, the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112 comprises aprocessing tool 502 coupled to afactory interface 504. Theprocessing tool 502 includes abuffer chamber 506 a and atransfer chamber 506 b which house afirst substrate handler 508 a and asecond substrate handler 508 b, respectively. Thebuffer chamber 506 a is coupled to afirst loadlock 510 a and asecond loadlock 510 b. Thetransfer chamber 506 b is coupled to thebuffer chamber 506 a, apre-clean chamber 511, a barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 and a seedlayer deposition chamber 514. - The
buffer chamber 506 a also may be coupled to a firstauxiliary processing chamber 516 a, a secondauxiliary processing chamber 516 b and/or a thirdauxiliary processing chamber 516 c. Fewer or more barrier layer deposition chambers, seed layer deposition chambers, preclean chambers or auxiliary processing chambers may be employed, and themodule controller 120 may communicate with and/or control the processes performed within each chamber. - Loadlock chambers510 a-b may comprise any conventional loadlock chambers capable of transferring substrates from the
factory interface 504 to thebuffer chamber 506 a. Thepre-clean chamber 511 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of cleaning an interconnect feature (e.g., to remove a metal oxide such as copper oxide from an underlying metal layer to be connected to with the interconnect) such as a conventional high density plasma (HDP) etch chamber. - The barrier
layer deposition chamber 512 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of depositing a barrier layer on a substrate such as a self-ionizing plasma (SIP) physical vapor deposition (PVD) chamber, any other suitable PVD chamber or the like. In at least one embodiment, the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 is a Ta/TaN SIP PVD chamber. - The seed
layer deposition chamber 514 may comprise any conventional processing chamber capable of depositing a seed layer on a substrate such as an SIP PVD chamber, any other suitable PVD chamber or the like. In at least one embodiment, the seedlayer deposition chamber 514 is a copper SIP PVD chamber. The auxiliary processing chambers 516 a-c, if employed, may include, for example, cooldown chambers, substrate orienters, degas chambers, inspections chambers or the like. - In at least one embodiment of the invention, the
processing tool 502 is based on an Endura™ platform manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Any other barrier/seed layer deposition system configuration may be similarly employed. - The
factory interface 504 includes abuffer chamber 518 which houses athird substrate handler 520 and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 522 a-d. It will understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within thebuffer chamber 518, and that any number of loadports may be coupled to thebuffer chamber 518. - As shown in FIG. 5, the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 502 includes anintegrated inspection system 524. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 5, theintegrated inspection system 524 includes adefect detection tool 524 a and ametrology tool 524 b both coupled to thebuffer chamber 518 of thefactory interface 504. Alternatively, theintegrated inspection system 524 may include only one of thedefect detection tool 524 a and themetrology tool 524 b, or may be coupled to theprocessing tool 502 rather than to the factory interface 504 (e.g., by coupling thedefect detection tool 524 a and/or themetrology tool 524 b to thebuffer chamber 506 a such as at the location of one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 516 a-c). - The
defect detection tool 524 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thedefect detection tool 524 a comprises the Excite™ or integrated particle monitor (IPM™) defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998 and titled “A PIXEL BASED MACHINE FOR PATTERNED WAFERS”. Thedefect detection tool 524 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information. Thedefect detection tool 524 a may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 524 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring barrier layer and/or seed layer thickness or other relevant barrier and/or seed layer information. Exemplary metrology tools include x-ray, thermal, sonic, laser, optical interference, light scattering or eddy-current based metrology tools, four point probes, etc. Themetrology tool 524 b also may measure the dimensions of interconnect features present on a substrate (e.g., line or via depth, width, profile, and/or other critical dimension information). In at least one embodiment of the invention, themetrology tool 524 b comprises an x-ray reflectometry system that examines the x-ray interference pattern produced by a film to determine film thickness, density, roughness, etc. One such system is the METAPROBEX reflectometer manufactured by Thermawave, Inc., although other systems may be employed. For determining interconnect feature information, themetrology system 524 b may include a laser based metrology tool wherein laser light is scattered off of a substrate surface and analyzed to determine interconnect feature density, depth, profile, width and/or other critical dimension information as is known in the art. - The
metrology tool 524 b can provide information regarding interconnect feature density and/or dimensions/profile to themodule controller 120, and based on this information themodule controller 120 may determine an appropriate barrier layer and/or seed layer process for a substrate as described further below. In the embodiment of FIG. 1B, theEMC 112 a additionally or alternatively may perform such functions. - In operation, a cassette or carrier of substrates is delivered to the
factory interface 504 of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. In particular, the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 522 a-d. Each loadport 522 a-d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers. Once the substrate carrier has been loaded into the appropriate loadport 522 a-d of thefactory interface 504, thesubstrate handler 520 retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to thefirst loadlock 510 a. Thereafter thesubstrate handler 508 a of theprocessing tool 502 retrieves the substrate from thefirst loadlock 510 a and transfers the substrate to a degas chamber (e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a-c) where the substrate is degassed. After the substrate is degassed, thesubstrate handler 508 a transfers the substrate to a first pass-through 526 of theprocessing tool 502. - The
substrate handler 508 b of theprocessing tool 502 retrieves the substrate from the first pass-through 526 and transfers the substrate to thepreclean chamber 511 where the substrate is precleaned (e.g., to remove metal oxide from a base of each interconnect feature formed on the substrate) as is known in the art. The substrate then is transferred to the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512. - Within the barrier
layer deposition chamber 512, a barrier layer is deposited on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and the substrate is transferred to the seedlayer deposition chamber 514. Within the seedlayer deposition chamber 514, a seed layer is similarly deposited on the substrate. - Thereafter, the substrate is transferred to a second pass-through528 of the
processing tool 502 by thesubstrate handler 508 b and thesubstrate handler 508 a then transfers the substrate to theloadlock 510 b. After barrier layer and/or seed layer deposition, the substrate may be processed within one or more of the auxiliary processing chambers 516 a-c (e.g., for substrate orientation purposes, for degassing, for cooldown, etc.). - After the substrate has been returned to the
second loadlock 510 b, thesubstrate handler 520 of thefactory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from thesecond loadlock 510 b and transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 524 a and themetrology tool 524 b. Assuming the substrate is first transferred to thedefect detection tool 524 a, thedefect detection tool 524 a performs defect detection on the substrate (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Following defect detection, thesubstrate handler 520 of thefactory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from thedefect detection tool 524 a and transfers the substrate to themetrology tool 524 b. - The
metrology tool 524 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, and/or other critical dimension information. Themetrology tool 524 b then provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 112 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thereafter, thesubstrate handler 520 of thefactory interface 504 retrieves the substrate from themetrology tool 524 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 522 a-d). - It will be understood that more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112. For example, while one substrate is being processed within the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512, up to two other substrates may be simultaneously processed within thechambers defect detection tool 524 a or while metrology is performed within themetrology tool 524 b on a different substrate. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of thedefect detection tool 524 a and themetrology tool 524 b, defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 (if desired). - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 112 a also may comprise such computer program code. - Note that while the operation of the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112 has been described with regard to performing defect detection and/or metrology on a deposited barrier layer and a deposited seed layer only after both layers have been deposited, thedefect detection tool 524 a and themetrology tool 524 b may perform defect detection and metrology, respectively, on a deposited barrier layer before a seed layer is formed over the barrier layer. - The
metrology tool 524 a also may be employed to measure the dimensions of interconnect features of a substrate (e.g., via and/or line width, depth, profile, etc.) prior to barrier layer deposition, and to communicate such dimension information to themodule controller 120 and/or to theEMC 112 a. This information then may be used to determine a barrier layer deposition process and/or a seed layer deposition process to perform within the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 and/or the seedlayer deposition chamber 514, respectively, as described further below. Interconnect feature density may be similarly determined and employed. - In an embodiment wherein the
tool 112 employs theEMC 112 a and theAPC module 112 b (FIG. 1B), all or part of the information obtained from theintegrated inspection system 524 may be communicated to theEMC 112 a of thetool 112. In this manner, theEMC 112 a and theAPC module 112 b may at least partially control the processes performed within thechambers - FIG. 6 is a top plan view of an exemplary embodiment of the
electroplating tool 114 of theinventive system 100 of FIGS. 1A and 1B. With reference to FIG. 6, theelectroplating tool 114 comprises aprocessing tool 602 coupled to afactory interface 604. Theprocessing tool 602 includes achamber 606 which houses afirst substrate handler 608. Thefirst substrate handler 608 has two individuallycontrollable robot arms chamber 606 also includes afirst electroplating chamber 612 a, asecond electroplating chamber 612 b, athird electroplating chamber 612 c, and afourth electroplating chamber 612 d. Thechamber 606 further includes anintegrated bevel cleaner 614 and a spin rinse dryer 616 (in a stacked configuration, although other configurations may be employed). - The electroplating chambers612 a-d may comprise any conventional electroplating chambers capable of depositing a fill layer on the substrate (e.g., a metal layer such as copper or aluminum that “fills” interconnect features such as vias or lines etched within an interlayer dielectric). In at least one embodiment, each electroplating chamber 612 a-d is capable of depositing a copper fill layer on a substrate via the interaction of a copper sulfide base solution with a sulfuric acid (H2SO4) solution as is known in the art.
- The integrated
bevel cleaner 614 may comprise any conventional tool for removing deposited layers from an edge of a substrate. In at least one embodiment, theintegrated bevel cleaner 614 directs an etchant solution (e.g., H2SO4 and hydrogen peroxide) toward a beveled edge of a substrate to remove metal layers therefrom. The use of an etchant solution for substrate edge cleaning is well known and is not described further herein. The spin rinsedryer 616 may comprise any conventional spin rinse dryer capable of cleaning, rinsing and/or drying a substrate following edge cleaning. - It will be understood that the
processing tool 602 may be based on any equipment platform. For example, theprocessing tool 602 may be an Electra™ integrated electrochemical process (IECP™) system manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Suitable electroplating chambers/systems are also described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,113,771 and 6,258,220 which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Other systems/platforms may be employed. - The
factory interface 604 includes abuffer chamber 618 which houses asecond substrate handler 620, athird substrate handler 622 and anorienter 624, and which is coupled to a plurality of loadports 626 a-b. It will understood that in general, any number of substrate handlers may be located within thebuffer chamber 618, and that any number of loadports may be coupled to thebuffer chamber 618. Afirst anneal chamber 627 a and asecond anneal chamber 627 b also are coupled to thebuffer chamber 618. - As shown in FIG. 6, the
electroplating tool 114 includes a firstintegrated inspection system 628 and a secondintegrated inspection system 630. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 6, the firstintegrated inspection system 628 includes adefect detection tool 628 a and ametrology tool 628 b both coupled to thefirst anneal chamber 627 a. The secondintegrated inspection system 630 includes adefect detection tool 630 a and ametrology tool 630 b both coupled to thesecond anneal chamber 627 b. Alternatively, each integrated inspection system may include only one of a defect detection tool and a metrology tool, or may be coupled to theprocessing tool 602 rather than to thefactory interface 604. - Each
defect detection tool defect detection tool defect detection tool defect detection tool EMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tools metrology tool defect detection tools metrology tools anneal chambers - In operation, a substrate carrier is delivered to the
factory interface 604 of theelectroplating tool 114. In particular, the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 626 a-b. Each loadport 626 a-b may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers. Once the substrate carrier has been loaded into the appropriate loadport 626 a-b, one of thesubstrate handlers orienter 624. Theorienter 624 orients the substrate (e.g., by locating a flat or notch on the substrate as is known in the art). - Thereafter the
substrate handler 608 of theprocessing tool 602 retrieves the substrate from theorienter 624 and transfers the substrate to one of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d. A metal fill layer then is deposited on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below) and the substrate is transferred to the integrated bevel cleaner 614 (by one of therobot arms - Once the substrate has been transferred to the
integrated bevel cleaner 614, theintegrated bevel cleaner 614 cleans the edge (bevel) of the substrate (e.g., via an etchant). Following edge cleaning, the substrate is transferred to the spin rinsedryer 616 wherein the substrate is (1) cleaned (e.g., to remove residue from the edge cleaning process); (2) rinsed; and/or (3) dried. - Following the spin-rinse-dry process, the substrate is transferred to one of the
anneal chambers substrate handlers 620, 622). Assuming the substrate is transferred to thefirst anneal chamber 627 a, the substrate is annealed within thefirst anneal chamber 627 a. In at least one embodiment, the substrate is annealed in forming gas, nitrogen or argon at 250° C. for about 30 seconds, and the substrate then is rapidly cooled (e.g., within about 30 seconds). Such annealing stabilizes copper grain structure and copper resistivity. Other annealing processes also may be employed such as laser annealing, pedestal annealing, high pressure annealing or the like. - Following annealing, defection detection and/or metrology are performed on the substrate (e.g., via the
defect detection tool 628 a and themetrology tool 628 b), in any order. For example, thedefect detection tool 628 a may perform defect detection on the substrate (e.g., to determine the defect density of the surface of the electroplated fill layer, to identify or otherwise characterize or classify defects on the surface of the electroplated fill layer, etc.) and may communicate information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 628 b may analyze the substrate to determine such information as electroplated fill layer thickness and may provide this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 114 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 620 then retrieves the substrate from theanneal chamber 627 a and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 626 a-b). - It will be understood that more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the
electroplating tool 114. For example, while one substrate is being processed within theelectroplating chamber 612 a, up to three other substrates may be simultaneously processed within theelectroplating chambers 612 b-d. Likewise, substrates may be processed within the chambers 612 a-d while defect detection is performed by thedefect detection tools metrology tools anneal chambers defect detection tools metrology tools electroplating tool 114. Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the electroplating tool 114 (if desired). - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 114 a also may comprise such computer program code. - FIG. 7A is a top plan view of a first exemplary embodiment of the
planarization tool 116 of FIGS. 1A and 1B. In general, theplanarization tool 116 may comprise any tool or apparatus capable of planarizing a substrate as is known in the art and configured in accordance with the present invention as described below. - With reference to FIG. 7A, the
planarization tool 116 includes aprocessing tool 702 coupled to afactory interface 704. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7A, theprocessing tool 702 comprises a Mirra Mesa™ planarization tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. (e.g., a 200 mm substrate planarization tool) and described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/547,189, filed Apr. 11, 2000 and titled “METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATES USING AN INPUT MODULE”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. It will be understood that any other planarization apparatus may be similarly employed. - The
processing tool 702 includes arobot 706 that is movable along atrack 708, aninput shuttle 710, apolishing system 712 and acleaning system 714. Thepolishing system 712 includes aload cup 716, afirst polishing platen 718 a (e.g., a bulk polishing platen), asecond polishing platen 718 b (e.g., an endpoint on barrier layer polishing platen) and athird polishing platen 718 c (e.g., a barrier layer buff polishing platen). Thecleaning system 714 includes aninput module 720 a, amegasonic module 720 b, afirst scrubber module 720 c, asecond scrubber module 720 d, a spin rinsedryer module 720 e and anoutput module 720 f. -
Factory interface 704 includes abuffer chamber 722, asubstrate handler 724 located within thebuffer chamber 722 and a plurality of loadports 726 a-d coupled to thebuffer chamber 722. Anintegrated inspection system 728 also is coupled to thebuffer chamber 722 as shown. In general, any number of substrate handlers and/or loadports may be employed within thefactory interface 704. - In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7A, the
integrated inspection system 728 includes adefect detection tool 730 a and ametrology tool 730 b both coupled to thebuffer chamber 722 of thefactory interface 704. Alternatively, theintegrated inspection system 728 may include only one of thedefect detection tool 730 a and themetrology tool 730 b. - The
defect detection tool 730 a may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thedefect detection tool 730 a comprises the Excite™ or IPM™ defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998. Thedefect detection tool 730 a may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information. Thedefect detection tool 730 a may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 730 b may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the planarity of a planarized substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, themetrology tool 730 b may comprise a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics, or aNovascan 840, 2200 or 3000 measurement tool manufactured by Nova Measuring Instruments; or an eddy-current based thickness measurement tool such as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/574,008, filed May 19, 2000 and titled “EDDY CURRENT SENSING OF METAL REMOVAL FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No. 09/900,664, filed Jul. 6, 2001 and titled “COMBINED EDDY CURRENT SENSING AND OPTICAL MONITORING FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No. 09/918,591, filed Jul. 27, 2001 and titled “CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING OF A METAL LAYER WITH POLISHING RATE MONITORING”; and Ser. No. 09/847,867, filed May 2, 2001 and titled “INTEGRATED ENDPOINT DETECTION SYSTEM WITH OPTICAL AND EDDY CURRENT MONITORING”, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. - In operation, a substrate carrier is delivered to the
factory interface 704 of theplanarization tool 116. In particular, the substrate carrier is delivered to one of the loadports 726 a-d. Each loadport 726 a-d may or may not be configured with pod opening capability for opening sealed substrate carriers. Once the substrate carrier has been loaded into the appropriate loadport 726 a-d, thesubstrate handler 724 retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to therobot 706. Thereafter therobot 706 transfers the substrate to theload cup 716 of thepolishing system 712 via thetrack 708. The substrate is then polished within the polishing system 712 (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below employing one or more of the polishing platens 718 a-c) and is transferred to theinput module 720 a of thecleaning system 714 via theinput shuttle 710. - The substrate is cleaned in the
megasonic module 720 b, scrubbed within one or both of thescrubber modules 720 c-d and dried in the spin rinsedryer module 720 e. The substrate then is transferred to theoutput module 720 f and from theoutput module 720 f to the substrate handler 724 (via the robot 706). - The
substrate handler 724 transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 730 a and themetrology tool 730 b. Assuming the substrate is first transferred to thedefect detection tool 730 a, thedefect detection tool 730 a performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes or classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 724 retrieves the substrate from thedefect detection tool 730 a and transfers the substrate to themetrology tool 730 b. - The
metrology tool 730 b analyzes the substrate to determine such information as surface planarity and provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 724 retrieves the substrate from themetrology tool 730 b and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of the loadports 726 a-d). - It will be understood that more than one substrate may be processed at a time within the
planarization tool 116. For example, while one substrate is being processed within the polishing system 712 (e.g., on one platen), other substrates may be simultaneously processed within the polishing system 712 (e.g., on other platens) and/or cleaned within thecleaning system 714. Likewise, substrates may be processed within thepolishing system 712 and/or thecleaning system 714 while defect detection is performed within thedefect detection tool 730 a or while metrology is performed within themetrology tool 730 b on a different substrate. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of thedefect detection tool 730 a and themetrology tool 730 b, defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of theplanarization tool 116. Defect detection and/or metrology therefore may be performed on every substrate processed within the planarization tool 116 (if desired). - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 116 a also may comprise such computer program code. - FIG. 7B is a top plan view of a second exemplary embodiment of the
planarization tool 116 of FIGS. 1A and 1B (referred to asplanarization tool 116′ for convenience). Theplanarization tool 116′ of FIG. 7B is similar to theplanarization tool 116 of FIG. 7A, and includes aprocessing tool 702′ coupled to afactory interface 704′. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, theprocessing tool 702′ comprises a Reflexion™ planarization tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. (e.g., a 300 mm substrate planarization tool) and described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/244,456, filed Feb. 4, 1999 and titled “APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING WITH AN ADVANCEABLE POLISHING SHEET”, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - The
processing tool 702′ includes asubstrate handler 706′ (e.g., a “wet” robot), aninput shuttle 710′, apolishing system 712′ and acleaning system 714′. Thepolishing system 712′ includes aload cup 716′, afirst polishing platen 718 a′ (e.g., a bulk polishing platen), asecond polishing platen 718 b′ (e.g., an endpoint on barrier layer polishing platen) and athird polishing platen 718 c′ (e.g., a barrier layer buff polishing platen). Thecleaning system 714′ includes aninput module 720 a′, amegasonic module 720 b′, afirst scrubber module 720 c′, asecond scrubber module 720 d′, a spin rinsedryer module 720 e′ and anoutput module 720 f′. -
Factory interface 704′ includes abuffer chamber 722′, asubstrate handler 724′ located within thebuffer chamber 722′ and a plurality of loadports 726 a′-b′ coupled to thebuffer chamber 722′. Anintegrated inspection system 728′ also is coupled to thebuffer chamber 722′ as shown. In general, any number of substrate handlers and/or loadports may be employed within thefactory interface 704′. - In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, the
integrated inspection system 728′ includes adefect detection tool 730 a′ and ametrology tool 730 b′ both coupled to thebuffer chamber 722′ of thefactory interface 704′. Alternatively, theintegrated inspection system 728′ may include only one of thedefect detection tool 730 a′ and themetrology tool 730 b′. - The
defect detection tool 730 a′ may comprise any conventional defect detection tool capable of detecting, characterizing and/or classifying defects on a surface of a substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thedefect detection tool 730 a′ comprises the Excite™ or IPM™ defect detection tool manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. and described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/110,870, filed Jul. 7, 1998. Thedefect detection tool 730 a′ may, for example, merely provide a measure of defect density on a substrate surface or may provide detailed information about any detected defects such as defect characterization or classification information. Thedefect detection tool 730 a′ may provide such information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). - The
metrology tool 730 b′ may comprise any conventional metrology tool capable of measuring the planarity of a planarized substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, themetrology tool 730 b′ may comprise a reflectometry-based thickness measurement tool such as a NanoSpec 9000 or 9000B measurement tool manufactured by Nanometrics, or aNovascan 840, 2200 or 3000 measurement tool manufactured by Nova Measuring Instruments; or an eddy-current based thickness measurement tool such as described in previously incorporated U.S. patent application Serial No. 09/574,008, filed May 19, 2000 and titled “EDDY CURRENT SENSING OF METAL REMOVAL FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No. 09/900,664, filed Jul. 6, 2001 and titled “COMBINED EDDY CURRENT SENSING AND OPTICAL MONITORING FOR CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING”; Ser. No. 09/918,591, filed Jul. 27, 2001 and titled “CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING OF A METAL LAYER WITH POLISHING RATE MONITORING”; and Ser. No. 09/847,867, filed May 2, 2001 and titled “INTEGRATED ENDPOINT DETECTION SYSTEM WITH OPTICAL AND EDDY CURRENT MONITORING”. - In operation, a substrate carrier is delivered to the
factory interface 704′ of theplanarization tool 116′. In particular, the substrate carrier is delivered to one of theloadports 726 a′-b′. Once the substrate carrier has been loaded into theappropriate loadport 726 a′-b′, thesubstrate handler 724′ retrieves a substrate from the substrate carrier and transfers the substrate to theinput shuttle 710′. Thereafter thesubstrate handler 706′ transfers the substrate from theinput shuttle 710′ to theload cup 716′ of thepolishing system 712′. The substrate is then polished within thepolishing system 712′ (e.g., in accordance with one or more of the inventive processes described below employing one or more of the polishingplatens 718 a′-c′) and is transferred to theinput module 720 a′ of thecleaning system 714′ via thesubstrate handler 706′ and theinput shuttle 710′. - The substrate is cleaned in the
megasonic module 720 b′, scrubbed within one or both of thescrubber modules 720 c′-d′ and dried in the spin rinsedryer module 720 e′. The substrate then is transferred to theoutput module 720 f′ and from theoutput module 720 f′ to thesubstrate handler 724′ (via therobot 706′). - The
substrate handler 724′ transfers the substrate to one of thedefect detection tool 730 a′ and themetrology tool 730 b′. Assuming the substrate is first transferred to thedefect detection tool 730 a′, thedefect detection tool 730 a′ performs defect detection (e.g., determines the defect density on the surface of the substrate, identifies or otherwise characterizes/classifies defects on the surface of the substrate, etc.) and communicates information regarding the results of the defect detection to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 724′ retrieves the substrate from thedefect detection tool 730 a′ and transfers the substrate to themetrology tool 730 b′. - The
metrology tool 730 b′ analyzes the substrate to determine such information as surface planarity and provides this information to the module controller 120 (and/or to theEMC 116 a in the system of FIG. 1B). Thesubstrate handler 724′ retrieves the substrate from themetrology tool 730 b′ and returns the substrate to a substrate carrier (located within one of theloadports 726 a′-b′). - As with the
planarization tool 116 of FIG. 7A, more than one substrate may be processed at a time within theplanarization tool 116′. For example, while one substrate is being processed within thepolishing system 712′ (e.g., on one platen), other substrates may be simultaneously processed within thepolishing system 712′ (e.g., on other platens) and/or cleaned within thecleaning system 714′. Likewise, substrates may be processed within thepolishing system 712′ and/or thecleaning system 714′ while defect detection is performed within thedefect detection tool 730 a′ or while metrology is performed within themetrology tool 730 b′ on a different substrate. In this manner, because of the integrated nature of thedefect detection tool 730 a′ and themetrology tool 730 b′, defect detection measurements and/or metrology measurements have little affect on the throughput of theplanarization tool 116′; and defect detection and/or metrology may be performed on every substrate processed within theplanarization tool 116′ (if desired). - Either the
module controller 120 or theFAB controller 122 may comprise computer program code for performing the various substrate transfer operations described above. TheEMC 116 a also may comprise such program code. - FIGS.8A-P illustrate a flowchart of an
exemplary process 800 for forming low K dielectric interconnects on a substrate in accordance with the present invention. Theexemplary process 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A-7B, and FIGS. 9A-L which illustrate cross sectional views of a semiconductor substrate during theprocess 800 of FIGS. 8A-P. For convenience purposes only, theprocess 800 is described with reference to the module controller 120 (without use of the EMC's 102 a-116 a and theAPC modules 102 b-116 b). It will be understood that all or a portion of theprocess 800 may be similarly performed using one or more of the EMC's 102 a-116 a and theAPC modules 102 b-116 b alone or in combination with themodule controller 120. - With reference to FIGS.8A-P, the
process 800 begins withstep 801. Instep 802 theinventive system 100 receives a substrate cassette (e.g., via a delivery mechanism such as an overhead conveyor system, an automated guided vehicle, etc.) and loads the substrate cassette into thefactory interface 304 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102. For example, the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 328 a-b of thefactory interface 304. For convenience, process flow within the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 will be described only with regard to a single substrate cassette in which substrates are processed employing loadport 328 a,substrate handler 326 a,loadlock 306 a,chambers defect detection tool 332 a andmetrology tool 334. In will be understood that substrates may be simultaneously processed therewith employingloadport 328 b,substrate handler 326 b,loadlock 306 b,chambers defect detection tool 332 b andmetrology tool 334. - In
step 803, a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette (at loadport 328 a) by thesubstrate handler 326 a and instep 804, the substrate is transferred to the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber 314 a (e.g., via thesubstrate handler 326 a, the loadlock 306 a and the substrate handler 310). Themodule controller 120 then determines a first low K dielectric deposition process to perform on the substrate (step 805). - The first low K dielectric deposition process may be based on, for example, information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 330 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 for a low K dielectric layer previously deposited within the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber - The
module controller 120 may determine a low K dielectric deposition process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner. For example, themodule controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206) a library of low K dielectric deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular low K dielectric interconnect feature density, interconnect feature dimension, interconnect feature profile, etc. Based on information about interconnect features to be formed and/or based on feedback information regarding one or more low K dielectric layers previously deposited within the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber module controller 120 may determine a low K dielectric deposition process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored low K dielectric deposition processes. Based on interconnect feature density, dimensions, profile, etc., to be formed on the substrate or based on feedback information regarding one or more low K dielectric layers previously deposited within the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber module controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected low K dielectric deposition process to better match the low K dielectric interconnect that is to be formed. - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a low K dielectric deposition process include chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, gas flow rates, deposition time, etc., which may affect one or more of thickness, dielectric constant, stress level, refractive index, defect density and uniformity of the deposited low K dielectric layer.
- The
module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on to be formed interconnect feature density, dimensions, profile, or other similar information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a low K dielectric layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic). FIG. 10A illustrates exemplary process parameters of a low K dielectric deposition process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a low K dielectric deposition process. Once a low K dielectric deposition process has been determined, instep 806, themodule controller 120 directs the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber 314 a to deposit a first low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the process. - FIG. 9A illustrates an
exemplary silicon substrate 902 having a first dual damascene or “T2” low Kdielectric layer 904 formed over a single damascene or “T1”structure 906. The singledamascene structure 906 may be formed within theinventive system 100 via a process similar toprocess 800. As shown in FIG. 9A, the singledamascene structure 906 includes anoxide layer 908 formed on thesilicon substrate 902, a first T1 low Kdielectric layer 910 formed on theoxide layer 908, a second T1 low Kdielectric layer 912 formed on the first T1low K dielectric 910 and copper lines 914 a-d formed within the second T1 low Kdielectric layer 912. Each copper line 914 a-d includes a barrier layer 916 a-d which surrounds a copper plug 918 a-d as shown. Each copper line 914 a-d may include a copper seed layer (not separately shown in FIG. 9A). - The
oxide layer 908 may be, for example, formed within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., by employing one or more oxide deposition chambers within theprocessing tool 302 of FIG. 3), as may be the first and second T1 low Kdielectric layers oxide layer 908 comprises approximately 10,000 angstroms of undoped silicon oxide deposited by conventional methods. Theoxide layer 908 may have, for example, a wafer-to-wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a within wafer uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 micron or larger particles per 200 mm wafer, and a refractive index of about 1.46. - The first T1 low K
dielectric layer 910 may comprise, for example, approximately 500 angstroms of a chemical vapor deposited (CVD) silicon carbide (e.g., Blok™). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C. and a pressure of about 8.7 Torr for a time of less than about 1 minute; and may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 4.8, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 micron or larger particles per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about −2.5×109 dyne/cm2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.95 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers). - The second T1 low K
dielectric layer 912 may comprise, for example, approximately 6500 angstroms of a CVD carbon doped oxide (e.g., Black Diamond™ (BD)). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C. and a pressure of about 4 Torr for about 1 minute; and may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 3.0, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 microns per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about 5-6×108 dyne/cm2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.42 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers). The barrier layers 916 a-d, the copper seed layers (not shown), and the copper plugs 918 a-d may be formed similarly to those described below with reference to theprocess 800. Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters. - In at least one embodiment, the first T2 low K
dielectric layer 904 comprises approximately 700 angstroms of a CVD silicon carbide (e.g., Blok™). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C. and a pressure of about 8.7 Torr for a time of less than about 1 minute; may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 4.8, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 microns per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about −2.5×109 dyne/cm2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.95 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers). Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters. - Referring again to the
process 800 of FIG. 8A, instep 807, following deposition of the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904 the substrate is transferred from the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber 314 a to the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber 318 a, and instep 808 themodule controller 120 determines a second low K dielectric deposition process to perform on the substrate. The second low K dielectric deposition process may be based on, for example, information obtained from theintegrated inspection system 330 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 for a low K dielectric layer previously deposited within the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber - As with the first low K dielectric deposition process, the
module controller 120 may store a library of second low K dielectric deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular interconnect feature density, interconnect dimension, interconnect profile, etc. Based on information about the interconnect features which are to be formed on the substrate and/or based on the first low K dielectric layer deposited on the substrate within the first low Kdielectric deposition chamber module controller 120 may determine a second low K dielectric layer deposition process and/or vary process parameters accordingly. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a second low K dielectric layer previously deposited on a substrate within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., if the previously deposited low K dielectric layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, etc.). - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a low K dielectric deposition process include chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, gas flow rates, deposition time, etc., which may affect one or more of thickness, dielectric constant, stress level, refractive index, defect density and uniformity of the deposited low K dielectric layer. The above process parameters are summarized in FIG. 10A and may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a low K dielectric deposition process to perform.
- Once a second low K dielectric deposition process has been determined, in
step 809, themodule controller 120 directs the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber 318 a to deposit a second low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the process. - FIG. 9B illustrates the
substrate 902 having a second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 formed over the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904 within the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber 318 a. In at least one embodiment, the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 comprises approximately 11000 angstroms of a CVD carbon doped oxide (e.g., Black Diamond™ (BD)). Such a dielectric layer may be deposited at a temperature of about 350° C. and a pressure of about 4 Torr for about 1 minute; and may have, for example, a dielectric constant of about 3.0, a within wafer thickness uniformity variation of less than about 5%, a wafer-to-wafer uniformity variation of less than about 6%, a defect density of less than about thirty 0.2 microns per 200 mm wafer, a stress level of about 5-6×108 dyne/cm2 compressive and a refractive index of about 1.42 (at a wavelength of 633 nanometers). Other thicknesses, dielectric constants, uniformities, defect densities, stress levels, refractive indices and materials also may be employed, as may other process parameters. - In
step 810, the substrate is transferred from the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber 318 a to the factory interface 304 (unless an anti-reflection coating is first deposited on the substrate within one of thechambers integrated inspection system 330. For example, the substrate may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 332 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following low K dielectric layer deposition within the second low Kdielectric deposition chamber 318 a and/or may be inspected within themetrology tool 334 to determine the thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, refractive index, etc., of the first and/or the second low K dielectric layers deposited within the low K dielectric deposition tool 102 (e.g., the first and second T2 low Kdielectric layers 904, 920). Similar information may be obtained regarding any anti-reflection coating deposited on the substrate within the anti-reflectioncoating deposition chambers module controller 120; and the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette from which it was extracted. - In
step 811 themodule controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers have an acceptable thicknesses, uniformities, indices of refraction, stress levels, etc.). If one or more of the deposited low K dielectric layers are not acceptable, instep 812, themodule controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 813; otherwise followingstep 811, theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 813. - In
step 813, themodule controller 120 determines if all substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If all substrates in the substrate cassette have not been processed, theprocess 800 returns to step 803 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to process as described previously; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds to step 814. - In
step 814, the substrate cassette is transferred from the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 to thelithography tool 104. As stated, thelithography tool 104 may include, for example, an FSI P2500 system manufactured by FSI International, Inc. for depositing an anti-reflection coating such as a bottom anti-reflection coating (BARC) layer, a DNS-80B system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for forming a uniform photoresist layer over the surface of a substrate, an ASML-5500/90 photoresist exposure system manufactured by ASM Lithography Inc. for exposing a photoresist layer to a desired mask pattern, and a DNS system manufactured by Dai Nippon Screen for developing the exposed photoresist layer (thereby forming the desired patterned masking layer). Such lithography tools are well known in the art; and any other conventional lithography tool may be similarly employed. - In
step 815, a masking layer is deposited on and is patterned for each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette. In at least one embodiment of the invention, instep 815, each non-defective substrate is processed as follows: - 1. approximately 800 angstroms of BARC are deposited on the substrate (e.g., a
BARC layer 922 in FIG. 9C); - 2. approximately 6600 angstroms of photoresist (e.g., TOK P419 manufactured by TOK or a similar resist) are deposited on the substrate (e.g., a
photoresist layer 924 shown patterned in FIG. 9D); and - 3. the photoresist is patterned (e.g., exposed and developed) to form one or more patterned masking layer features (e.g., patterned masking layer features924 a-c in FIG. 9D) for subsequent etching of the second T2 low K
dielectric layer 920 as described below. - It will be understood that one or more conventional soft or hard bake or other curing procedures may be employed during patterned masking layer formation. Other lithographic processes also may be employed.
- Once each non-defect substrate within the substrate cassette has had a masking layer formed thereon, in
step 816, the substrate cassette is transferred to theetch tool 106; and the substrate cassette is loaded into thefactory interface 404 of theetch tool 106. For example, the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a-d of thefactory interface 404. - In
step 817, a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and instep 818, the patterned masking layer of the substrate (e.g., the patternedmasking layer 924 formed on the substrate by thelithography tool 104 as previously described, and used to define the regions of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 to be etched) is inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422. Assuming theetch tool 106 of FIG. 4A is employed within thesystem 100,steps substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a-d), and by transferring the substrate to themetrology tool 424 b via thesubstrate handler 418. Thereafter themetrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's patterned masking layer and may communicate information about the patterned masking layer to themodule controller 120. For example, themetrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as pattern density, patterned masking layer feature information (e.g., size, profile or the like), etc., for thefeatures 924 a-b of FIG. 9D to themodule controller 120. - An integrated metrology tool (not shown) similarly may be coupled to the
lithography tool 104 and employed to measure and communicate patterned masking layer information to themodule controller 120 in place of or in addition to themetrology tool 424 b of theetch tool 106. Likewise, a standalone metrology tool (not shown) may also be employed. One such stand alone metrology tool is the SEM 7830 SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. - After information regarding the substrate's patterned masking layer has been communicated to the module controller120 (in step 818), in
step 819 themodule controller 120 determines whether the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate is acceptable. For example, themodule controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 924) is overpatterned (e.g., hasfeatures 924 a-c that will result in second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., hasfeatures 924 a-c that will result in second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 features that are too narrow). If the patterned masking layer on the substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 820) and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 821; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 821. Defective substrates, for example, may be sorted and returned to thelithography tool 104 for re-processing after all substrates within the substrate cassette have been processed within theetch tool 106. In at least one embodiment, the target width for thefeatures 924 a-c is about 0.27-0.29 microns with a uniformity variation of less than 10%, although any other suitable feature dimensions/uniformity variations may be employed. - In
step 821, the substrate is transferred from thefactory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408). Instep 822, themodule controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a-d based on, for example, the information obtained about the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate (e.g., pattern density information, dimensions and/or profile of features of the patterned masking layer which may influence etch dimensions/profile, etc.). This type of information constitutes one example of feedforward information. It will be understood that the etch process may be determined based on patterned masking layer information (or other feedforward information) at any time after the information is received from themetrology tool 424 b (or any other metrology tool). - The etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on, for example, information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process). This type of information constitutes feedback information. - The
module controller 120 may determine an etch process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner. For example, themodule controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206) a library of etch processes each of which has been optimized for a particular patterned masking layer density, feature dimensions, feature profile, etc. Based on feedforward information about the patterned masking layer, and/or based on other feedforward information, themodule controller 120 may determine an etch process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored etch processes. Based on actual patterned masking layer density, feature dimensions, feature profile or other feedforward information, themodule controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected etch process to better match the characteristics of the substrate. - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for an etch process include source power, substrate bias power, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, process gas flow rates, etc., which may affect one or more of etched feature dimensions (e.g., width or depth), etched feature profile, etch rate, etch uniformity, etc.
- In one exemplary embodiment, when the
BARC layer 922 and thephotoresist layer 924 are employed (e.g., as shown in FIG. 9D), an O2 etch process is employed to etch theBARC layer 922, and a CF4, N2, CO, Ar, and/or CHF3 etch process is employed to etch the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 to expose the underlying first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904. In such an etch process, themodule controller 120 may, for example, based on feedforward information about a patterned masking layer and/or feedback information about a previously etched substrate, adjust etched feature dimensions/profile by adjusting CHF3, O2 and/or other etch gas flow rates, chamber pressure (e.g., processing pressure), etch time, source power, substrate bias power, etc., during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920. - In another embodiment, the
module controller 120 may compare a dimension of a feature of a patterned masking layer (i.e., a feedforward feature dimension) to a target feature dimension (e.g., a desired or ideal feature dimension of a patterned masking layer). For example, themodule controller 120 may compare the feedforward feature dimension to a range of acceptable feature dimensions or some other applicable control limit (CL), such as a device specification. Assuming the feedforward feature dimension is within the desired/acceptable range, themodule controller 120 then may determine if an etch process suitable for etching a substrate having a patterned masking layer with the target feature dimension may be adjusted to correct for any deviation between the feedforward feature dimension and the target feature dimension (e.g., whether any required process adjustment is within the range or control limit of acceptable process adjustments). If so, then themodule controller 120 may adjust the etch process accordingly. - Assuming the feedforward feature dimension is width, if the feedforward feature width of the patterned masking layer is smaller or larger than the target feature width, then the
module controller 120 may increase or decrease etch gas (e.g., CHF3, O2, etc.) and/or other gas (e.g., Ar, N2, etc.) flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 and/or theBARC layer 922 to compensate for the smaller or larger than desired patterned masking layer feature width. Themodule controller 120 also may compensate for smaller or larger patterned masking layer feature width by increasing or decreasing overetch time, chamber pressure, bias power, source power and/or the like during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 and/or theBARC layer 922. Other techniques may be similarly employed. - In another embodiment, an etch process may be determined based on feedback information regarding a previously etched substrate. A characteristic of an etched feature of the previously etched substrate (i.e., a feedback etched feature characteristic) is compared to a target etched feature characteristic (e.g., a desired or ideal etched feature characteristic). The
module controller 120 then may determine an etch process based on the etch process used to etch the previous substrate (e.g., by adjusting certain etch parameters of the process). For example, assume the feedback etched feature characteristic is etched feature width. If the feedback etched feature width (of the previously etched substrate) is smaller or larger than the target etched feature width, then themodule controller 120 may increase or decrease etched feature width for subsequently etched substrates by increasing or decreasing etch gas and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 and/or theBARC layer 922. Themodule controller 120 similarly may compensate by increasing or decreasing overetch time, chamber pressure, bias power, source power and/or the like during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 and/or theBARC layer 922. Other techniques may be similarly employed. - As another example, assume that the feedback etched feature characteristic is etched feature profile. If the etched feature profile of the previously etched substrate is less or more vertical than the target profile, then the
module controller 120 may increase or decrease etched feature profile angle for subsequently etched substrates by adjusting etch gas and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios during etching of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920. Other exemplary feedback information that may be employed to affect an etch process includes (1) etch depth to affect etch time (e.g., which may be increased to increase etch depth); and/or (2) within-wafer etch uniformity to affect magnetic field strength (e.g., to improve uniformity as described further below). - The
module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on patterned masking layer density, feature dimensions, feature profile, or other feedforward information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted via algorithms based on feedback information regarding a substrate previously etched within the etch tool 106 (e.g., if previously formed etch features were too deep, too shallow, too narrow, too wide, had an undesirable profile, if a previously etched substrate had too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic). - In one embodiment, feedback information regarding the defect density of a previously etched substrate may be employed to affect the length of time and/or how often an etch chamber is cleaned following etching or seasoned following chamber maintenance, O2 flow or source power during patterned masking layer removal (e.g., during ashing), etc., so as to reduce defect density, polymeric residue and the like. For example, defect density feedback information may be used to determine when to perform an etch chamber clean (e.g., if defect density exceeds a predetermined threshold). In this manner, an etch chamber need not be cleaned prematurely. This may reduce the number of chamber cleanings (and thus chamber seasonings) that are performed and thus decrease chamber downtime. FIG. 10B(1) and FIG. 10B(2) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an etch process.
- It will be understood that information regarding a patterned masking layer present on a substrate may be used to affect other processing tools such as the
lithography tool 104 used to define the patterned masking layer. For example, the module controller 120 (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedback information about the-patterned masking layer formed by a given lithography process, one or more parameters of the lithography process to affect future patterned masking layer formation. Adjustable process parameters of thelithography tool 104 used to form a patterned masking layer include, for example, soft/hard bake times, dose of a lithographic process, exposure time, development time, masking layer deposition time, spin rates, etc. - Referring again to FIGS.8A-P, once an etch process has been determined, in
step 823, themodule controller 120 directs theetch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process. Instep 824, themodule controller 120 directs theetch tool 106 to remove the patterned masking layer from the substrate. For example, if the patterned masking layer is formed from photoresist, any conventional technique may be employed to remove the patterned masking layer (e.g., such as the use of an oxygen plasma, often referred to as “ashing”). In general, ashing may be performed in-situ (e.g., within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d), or ex-situ (e.g., within a separate ashing chamber (not shown)). - FIG. 9E illustrates the
second T 2 low Kdielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patternedmasking layer 924 and theBARC layer 922. TheBARC layer 922 may be removed by, for example, an O2 plasma. As shown in FIG. 9E, etchedfeatures 920 a-c are formed within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 which expose the underlying first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904. Additionally, when photoresist is employed as themasking layer 924, residual polymeric material (not shown) may remain on the sidewalls of the etchedfeatures 920 a-c (which may subsequently be removed via thecleaning tool 108 as described further below). Preferably little or no ash residue remains and the defect density of thesubstrate 902 following ashing is less than fifty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer. Typicaletched features 920 a-c may have profiles of 88-90 degrees (e.g., near vertical profiles). Other defect densities or etched feature profiles may be employed. - In
step 825, the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a-d to thefactory interface 404. Instep 826 the substrate may be inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422. For example, the substrate may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within themetrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920. Information regarding the substrate is communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 827 themodule controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etched substrate is not acceptable, instep 828, themodule controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 829; otherwise followingstep 827, theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 829. - In
step 829, themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, theprocess 800 returns to step 817 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds to step 830. - Following etching of all substrates within the substrate cassette, in
step 830 the substrate cassette is transferred from theetch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.). Thereafter, instep 831, themodule controller 120 directs thecleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques. For example, one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ dilute hydrofluoric acid, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates. Thecleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following removal of the patterned masking layer employed during the etching of each substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thecleaning tool 108 comprises a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion. - In
step 832 the substrate cassette is transferred from thecleaning tool 108 back to thelithography tool 104. Prior to arrival at thelithography tool 104, one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within thecleaning tool 108. One exemplary stand-alone metrology tool suitable for measuring etched feature dimensions/profile is the SEM 7830SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. One exemplary stand-alone defect detection tool suitable for measuring defect density is the WF736 DUO defect detection system also manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Other similar tools may be employed. Instep 833, a masking layer is deposited on and is patterned for each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette. - In at least one embodiment of the invention, in
step 833, each non-defective substrate is processed as follows: - 1. approximately 800 angstroms of BARC are deposited on the substrate (e.g., a
BARC layer 926 in FIG. 9F which fills a portion of eachetched feature 920 a-c as shown); - 2. approximately 7000 angstroms of photoresist (e.g., about400 angstroms of TOK TGF-Tr2 and about 6600 angstroms of TOK P419 manufactured by TOK or a similar resist) are deposited on the substrate (e.g., a
photoresist layer 928 shown patterned in FIG. 9F); and - 3. the photoresist is patterned (e.g., exposed and developed) to form one or more patterned masking layer features (e.g., patterned masking layer features928 a-b in FIG. 9F) for subsequent etching of the second T2 low K
dielectric layer 920 as described below. - It will be understood that one or more conventional soft or hard bake or other curing procedures may be employed during patterned masking layer formation. Other lithographic processes also may be employed.
- Once each non-defect substrate within the substrate cassette has had a masking layer formed thereon, in
step 834, the substrate cassette is transferred to theetch tool 106; and the substrate cassette is loaded into thefactory interface 404 of theetch tool 106. For example, the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a-d of thefactory interface 404. - In
step 835, a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and instep 836, the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patternedmasking layer 928 formed on the substrate by thelithography tool 104 as previously described and used to define second regions of the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 to be etched) is inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422. Assuming theetch tool 106 of FIG. 4A is employed within thesystem 100,steps substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a-d), and by transferring the substrate to themetrology tool 424 b via thesubstrate handler 418. Thereafter themetrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's patterned masking layer and may communicate information about the patternedmasking layer 928 to themodule controller 120. For example, themetrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as pattern density, patterned masking layer feature information (e.g., size, profile or the like), etc., for thefeatures 928 a-b of FIG. 9F to themodule controller 120. - An integrated metrology tool (not shown) similarly may be coupled to the
lithography tool 104 and employed to measure and communicate patterned masking layer information to themodule controller 120 in place of or in addition to themetrology tool 424 b of theetch tool 106. Likewise, a stand-alone metrology tool (not shown) may also be employed. - After information regarding the substrate's patterned masking layer has been communicated to the module controller120 (in step 836), in
step 837 themodule controller 120 determines whether the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate is acceptable. For example, themodule controller 120 may determine that the patterned masking layer (e.g., the patterned photoresist layer 928) is overpatterned (e.g., hasfeatures 928 a-b that will result in second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 features that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., hasfeatures 928 a-b that will result in second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 features that are too narrow). If the patterned masking layer on the substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 838) and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 839; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 839. Defective substrates, for example, may be sorted and returned to thelithography tool 104 for re-processing after all substrates within the substrate cassette have been processed within theetch tool 106. In at least one embodiment, the target width for thefeatures 928 a-b is about 0.33-0.35 microns with a uniformity variation of less than 10%, although any other suitable feature dimensions/uniformity variations may be employed. - In
step 839, the substrate is transferred from thefactory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408). Instep 840, themodule controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a-d based on, for example, the information obtained about the patterned masking layer formed on the substrate (e.g., pattern density information, dimensions and/or profile of features of the patterned masking layer which may influence etched feature dimensions/profile, etc.) as described previously with reference to step 822. It will be understood that the etch process may be determined based on patterned masking layer information (or other feedforward information) at any time after the information is received from themetrology tool 424 b (or any other metrology tool). - The etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on, for example, information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process) as described previously with reference to step 822. FIG. 10B(1) and FIG. 10B(2) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. As stated, these process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an etch process. - Once an etch process has been determined, in
step 841, themodule controller 120 directs theetch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process. Instep 842, themodule controller 120 directs theetch tool 106 to remove the patterned masking layer from the substrate. For example, if the patterned masking layer is formed from photoresist, any conventional technique may be employed to remove the patterned masking layer (e.g., such as the use of an oxygen plasma to perm ashing). In general, ashing may be performed in-situ (e.g., within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d) or ex-situ (e.g., within a separate ashing chamber (not shown)). - FIG. 9G illustrates the second T2 low K
dielectric layer 920 following etching and removal of the patternedmasking layer 928 and theBARC layer 926. As shown in FIG. 9G, etchedfeatures 920 d-e (e.g.,lines 920 d-e) are formed within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 in addition to the previously formed etchedfeatures 920 a-c (e.g., via 920 a-c) which expose the underlying first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904. - When photoresist is employed as the
masking layer 928, residual polymeric material (not shown) may remain on the sidewalls of the etched features 920 d-e (which may subsequently be removed via thecleaning tool 108 as described further below). Preferably little or no ash residue remains and the defect density of thesubstrate 902 following ashing is less than fifty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer. Typicaletched features 920 d-e may have profiles of 88-90 degrees (e.g., near vertical profiles). Other defect densities or etched feature profiles may be employed. - In
step 843, the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a-d to thefactory interface 404. Instep 844 the substrate may be inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422. For example, the substrate may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within themetrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920. Information regarding the substrate is communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 845 themodule controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the second T2 low Kdielectric layer 920 have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etched substrate is not acceptable, instep 846, themodule controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 847; otherwise followingstep 845, theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 847. - In
step 847, themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, theprocess 800 returns to step 835 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds to step 848. - Following etching of all substrates within the substrate cassette, in
step 848 the substrate cassette is transferred from theetch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.). Thereafter, instep 849, themodule controller 120 directs thecleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques. For example, one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ dilute hydrofluoric acid, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates. Thecleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following removal of the patterned masking layer employed during the etching of each substrate. In at least one embodiment of the invention, thecleaning tool 108 comprises a WPS/AKRION wet bench manufactured by Akrion. - In
step 850 the substrate cassette is transferred from thecleaning tool 108 back to theetch tool 106. Prior to arrival at theetch tool 106, one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within thecleaning tool 108. As stated, one exemplary stand-alone metrology tool suitable for measuring etched feature dimensions/profile is the SEM 7830 SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. One exemplary stand-alone defect detection tool suitable for measuring defect density is the WF736 DUO defect detection system also manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. Other similar tools may be employed. - At the
etch tool 106, the substrate cassette is loaded into thefactory interface 404 of theetch tool 106. For example, the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 420 a-d of thefactory interface 404. - In
step 851, a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette and instep 852, rather than employing the previously described stand-alone inspection systems, the substrate may be inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422 of theetch tool 106 to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed, etc., following cleaning within thecleaning tool 108. Assuming theetch tool 106 of FIG. 4A is employed within thesystem 100,steps substrate handler 418 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 420 a-d), and by transferring the substrate to themetrology tool 424 b via thesubstrate handler 418. Thereafter themetrology tool 424 b may inspect the substrate's etched features (e.g., features 920 d-e) and may communicate information about the etched features to themodule controller 120. For example, themetrology tool 424 b may communicate information such as etched feature density, size, profile or the like (following cleaning within the cleaning tool 108). Defect density or classification information may be similarly obtained via thedefect detection tool 424 a, and communicated to themodule controller 120. - After information regarding the substrate has been communicated to the module controller120 (in step 852), in
step 853 themodule controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable. For example, themodule controller 120 may determine that the etched features are too large or too small, that the substrate has too high of a defect density or was improperly cleaned, etc. If the substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette and marked as a defective substrate (step 854) and theprocess 800 returns to step 851; otherwise process 800 proceeds directly to step 855. - In
step 855, the substrate is transferred from thefactory interface 404 to one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., via the substrate handler 408). Instep 856, themodule controller 120 determines an etch process to perform on the substrate within the appropriate etch chamber 412 a-d in order to remove the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904 exposed by the etchedfeatures 920 a-c (FIG. 9B). The etch process may be based on, for example, (1) information obtained about the first T2 low K dielectric layer 904 (e.g., feedforward information such as thickness, dielectric constant, uniformity, stress level, index of refraction, density, defect density, etc., of the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904 as provided by theintegrated inspection system 330 of the low K dielectric deposition tool 102); (2) information such as the dimensions/profile of the etchedfeatures 920 a-c and/or 920 d-e as provided by theintegrated inspection system 422 of theetch tool 106; or (3) based on other feedforward information (in a manner similar to that described with reference to step 822). - The etch process alternatively or additionally may be based on information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 422 for a substrate previously etched within one of the etch chambers 412 a-d (e.g., information such as etched feature dimensions/profile that resulted for a given etch process), in a manner similar to that described with reference to step 822. - In one exemplary embodiment, a CHF3, O2 and Ar etch chemistry (or another fluorine-based chemistry) may be employed to etch the first T2 low K
dielectric layer 904. In such an etch process, themodule controller 120 may, for example, based on the feedforward information (e.g., about the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904, theetched features 920 a-c and/or 920 d-e, etc.) and/or feedback information about a previously etched substrate (e.g., etch depth, etch profile, etc., of a previously etched low K dielectric layer) adjust etching of the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904 by adjusting CHF3, O2, Ar and/or other gas flow rates and/or ratios, chamber pressure, etch time, source power, substrate bias, etc., during etching. FIG. 10B(1) and FIG. 10B(2) illustrate exemplary process parameters of an etch process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. Once an etch process has been determined, instep 857, themodule controller 120 directs theetch tool 106 to etch the substrate based on the etch process. - FIG. 9H illustrates the
substrate 902 following etching of the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904. As shown in FIG. 9H, following etching, copper plugs 918 a, 918 b and 918 d are exposed. - In
step 858, the substrate is transferred from one of the etch chambers 412 a-d to thefactory interface 404. Instep 859 the substrate may be inspected via theintegrated inspection system 422. For example, the substrate may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 424 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following etching and/or may be inspected within themetrology tool 424 b to determine the dimensions, profile or other critical dimension information relevant to the features etched within the first T2 low Kdielectric layer 904. Information regarding the substrate is communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 860 themodule controller 120 determines whether the etched substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect level on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the features etched within the first T2 low K dielectric layer have acceptable depths, widths, profiles, etc.). If the etch substrate is not acceptable, instep 861, themodule controller 120 marks (e.g., records that) the substrate is defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 862; otherwise followingstep 860, theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 862. - In
step 862, themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been etched. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been etched, theprocess 800 returns to step 851 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to etch as described previously; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds to step 863. - Following etching of all substrates within the substrate cassette, in
step 863 the substrate cassette is transferred from theetch tool 106 to the cleaning tool 108 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.). - In
step 864, themodule controller 120 directs thecleaning tool 108 to clean each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette using conventional cleaning techniques. For example, one or more wet cleaning techniques may be used that employ an appropriate solvent and/or other chemicals, Marangoni drying, megasonic cleaning, etc., whether done on a single substrate or on a batch of substrates. Thecleaning tool 108 may be employed, for example, to remove any residual polymeric material that remains following etching of the first T2 dielectric layer (e.g.,layer 904 in FIG. 9H). - In at least one embodiment of the invention, the etch and
clean tool 106′ of FIG. 4B may be employed within theinventive system 100. When the etch andclean tool 106′ is employed, any cleaning step following etching (e.g.,step cleaning chamber 430 and/or 432, rather than within thecleaning tool 108. In this manner, fewer inter-tool transfer operations (e.g., steps 830, 832, 848, 850, 863 and/or 865) need be performed, thereby increasing system throughput. - In yet another embodiment of the invention, the first T2 low K dielectric layer904 (exposed by etched
features 920 a-c) may be etched (opened) immediately after ashing, either within the same chamber used for ashing or within a separate etch chamber of theetch tool 106. In this manner, one or more of steps 850-864 of theprocess 800 may be eliminated. System throughput thereby may be increased. - Referring again to FIG. 8K, in
step 865 the substrate cassette is transferred from thecleaning tool 108 to theanneal furnace 110. As stated, theanneal furnace 110 may be a Canary Furnace manufactured by Canary or any other suitable furnace. Instep 866, each non-defective substrate within the substrate cassette is annealed. In at least one embodiment of the invention, the anneal process may comprise an approximately 30 minute argon anneal at 300° C., although another suitable anneal process may be employed (e.g., to degas and dry out the each substrate). Instep 867, the substrate cassette is transferred from the annealing furnace to the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. - Prior to arrival at the barrier/seed
layer deposition tool 112, one or more non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette may be inspected within a stand-alone or integrated metrology and/or defect detection tool (not shown) to determine one or more of defect density, etched feature dimensions/profile, whether all polymeric residue has been removed following cleaning within thecleaning tool 108, etc., as previously described. - In
step 868, the substrate cassette is loaded into thefactory interface 504 of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. For example, the substrate cassette may be loaded into one of the loadports 522 a-d of thefactory interface 504. - In
step 869, a substrate is extracted from the substrate cassette. Rather than employing the previously described stand-alone inspection systems, instep 870, etched features (e.g., vias and/or lines such as theetched features 920 a-e) formed on the substrate by theetch tool 106 and used to define the regions on the substrate where interconnects are to be formed, may be inspected via theintegrated inspection system 524 of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112. Assuming the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112 of FIG. 5 is employed within thesystem 100,steps substrate handler 520 to extract a substrate from the substrate cassette (located within one of the loadports 522 a-d), and by transferring the substrate to themetrology tool 524 b via thesubstrate handler 518. Thereafter themetrology tool 524 b may inspect the substrate's etched features and may communicate information about the etched features to themodule controller 120. For example, themetrology tool 524 b may communicate information such as etched feature density, etched feature dimensions (e.g., via and/or line width, depth, profile, etc.) or the like to themodule controller 120. - After information regarding the substrate's etched features has been communicated to the module controller120 (in step 870), in
step 871 themodule controller 120 determines whether the etched features formed on the substrate are acceptable. For example, themodule controller 120 may determine that etched features such as theetched features 920 a-e are overpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too wide) or underpatterned (e.g., have dimensions that will result in interconnects that are too narrow). If the etched features on the substrate are not acceptable, the substrate is returned to the substrate cassette, the substrate is marked as a defective substrate (step 872) and theprocess 800 returns to step 869 to obtain another substrate; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 873. - In
step 873 the substrate is transferred from thefactory interface 504 to a degas chamber (e.g., one of the auxiliary chambers 516 a-c) via thesubstrate handler 508 a, and the substrate is degassed. Any suitable degas process may be employed such as a conventional heated wafer chuck or lamp heated degas process. - Once the substrate has been degassed, in
step 874 the substrate is transferred to thepreclean chamber 511 via thesubstrate handler 508 a, thesubstrate handler 508 b and the pass-through 526 (as previously described) and the substrate is precleaned. Any suitable preclean process may be employed such as a conventional preclean process (e.g., employing Ar, He, H2 or N2 sputtering) or a reactive preclean process (e.g., employing a fluorine based reactive species). If desired, the preclean process may be based on information regarding the etched features present on the substrate (e.g., information such as etched feature density, dimensions, profile, etc., measured by themetrology tool 524 b of the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112 or the etch tool 106). For example, sputter yield may be proportional to via size and aspect ratio, and dependent on the type of dielectric in which the via is formed. The preclean process may be adjusted to compensate for these and other factors. - Following precleaning, in
step 875 the substrate is transferred to the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 via thesubstrate handler 508 b. Themodule controller 120 determines a barrier layer deposition process to perform on the substrate within the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 based on the information obtained about the etched features formed on the substrate (e.g., etched feature density information, dimension information, profile information, or other feedforward information). It will be understood that the barrier layer deposition process may be determined based on etched feature information at any time after the information is received from themetrology tool 524 b (or from another metrology tool). - The barrier layer deposition process alternatively or additionally may be based on (feedback) information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 524 for a barrier layer previously deposited within the barrier layer deposition chamber 512 (e.g., information such as deposited barrier layer thickness for a given deposition process, defect density or the like). - The
module controller 120 may determine a barrier layer deposition process (or any other process described herein) in any suitable manner. For example, themodule controller 120 may store (e.g., in the data storage device 206) a library of barrier layer deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, etc. Based on feedforward information about the etched features on which a barrier layer is to be deposited, and/or based on other feedforward information, themodule controller 120 may determine a barrier layer deposition process by selecting the “most optimal” process from the library of stored barrier layer deposition processes. Based on actual etched feature density, dimensions, profile, or other feedforward information, themodule controller 120 may adjust various process parameters of a selected barrier layer deposition process to better match the characteristics of the substrate. - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a barrier layer deposition process include RF bias, DC power, wafer bias, chamber base pressure, processing pressure, processing temperature, processing time, processing power, etc., which may affect one or more of sheet resistance (Rs), reflectivity, thickness, defect density and uniformity of the deposited barrier layer.
- The
module controller 120 may employ one or more algorithms (in addition to or in place of process libraries) for determining appropriate process parameters based on etched feature density, dimensions, profile, or other feedforward information. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a barrier layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited barrier layer is too thin, too thick, has too high of a defect density, or some other undesirable characteristic). FIG. 10C illustrates exemplary process parameters of a barrier layer deposition process that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information. These process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a barrier layer deposition process. - It will be understood that information regarding etched features present on a substrate may be used to affect other processing tools or subsystems such as the lithography tool and etch tool used to form the etched features (e.g.,
lithography tool 104 andetch tool 106 in FIGS. 1A and 1B). For example, the module controller 120 (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedback information about etched features formed by a given process, one or more parameters of the process to affect future etched feature formation. Adjustable process parameters of an etch tool used to etch features include, for example, etch time, etch rate, etch chemistry, etc., which may affect one or more of etched feature depth, critical dimension, uniformity, etc. Lithography dose of a lithographic process used to define etched features, as well as deposition time of a deposition process used to form an interlayer dielectric layer (in which etched features are formed) similarly may be adjusted based on etched feature feedback information. - Once a barrier layer deposition process has been determined, in
step 876, themodule controller 120 directs the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 to deposit a barrier layer on the substrate based on the process. FIG. 9I illustrates thesilicon substrate 902 after abarrier layer 930 has been deposited thereon. In at least one embodiment, thebarrier layer 930 comprises a 150-250 angstrom TaN layer or Ta/TaN stack. Exemplary barrier layer properties include a defect density of less than about thirty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer, a sheet resistance of about 80-87 ohms per square and a uniformity of about 6% or less. Other thicknesses/properties and other materials also may be employed. - In
step 877, the substrate is transferred from the barrierlayer deposition chamber 512 to the seedlayer deposition chamber 514, and themodule controller 120 determines a seed layer deposition process to perform on the substrate. The seed layer deposition process may be based on the information obtained about the etched features formed on the substrate (e.g., etched feature density information, dimension information, profile information, etc.), based on information obtained about the barrier layer deposited on the substrate (e.g., barrier layer thickness) or based on other feedforward information. - The seed layer deposition process alternatively or additionally may be based on information obtained from the
integrated inspection system 524 for a seed layer previously deposited within the seed layer deposition chamber 514 (e.g., information such as deposited seed layer thickness for a given deposition process), or based on other feedback information. - As with the barrier layer deposition processes, the
module controller 120 may store a library of seed layer deposition processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, etc. Based on feedforward information about the etched features on which a seed layer is to be deposited, themodule controller 120 may determine a seed layer deposition process and/or vary process parameters accordingly. Likewise one or more process parameters may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a seed layer previously deposited on a substrate (e.g., if the previously deposited seed layer was too thin, too thick, had too high of a defect density or some other desirable characteristics). - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a seed layer deposition process based on feedforward information (e.g., etched feature information) and/or feedback information (e.g., information about a previously deposited seed layer) include, for example, RF bias, DC power, wafer bias, chamber base pressure, processing pressure processing temperature, processing time, processing power, etc., which may affect one or more of sheet resistance (Rs), reflectivity, thickness, defect density and uniformity of a deposited seed layer. The above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a seed layer deposition process to perform. FIG. 10C summarizes these process parameters.
- Once a seed layer deposition process has been determined, in
step 878, themodule controller 120 directs the seedlayer deposition chamber 514 to deposit a seed layer on the substrate based on the process. - FIG. 9J illustrates the
substrate 902 following deposition of a seed layer 932 (step 878) thereon. In at least one embodiment, theseed layer 932 comprises about 1000-2000 angstroms of copper, although other materials and other thicknesses may be employed. Other exemplary seed layer properties include a resistivity of about 0.12 ohms per square and a uniformity of about 10% or less. Other seed layer property values may be used. - In
step 879, the substrate is transferred from the seedlayer deposition chamber 514 to thefactory interface 504, and the substrate is inspected via theintegrated inspection system 524. For example, the substrate may be inspected via thedefect detection tool 524 a to determine the number of defects present on the surface of the substrate following seed layer deposition and/or may be inspected within themetrology tool 524 b to determine the thickness and/or sheet resistance of the barrier layer and/or the seed layer deposited on the substrate. Information regarding the substrate then is communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 880 themodule controller 120 determines whether the substrate is acceptable (e.g., if the defect density on the surface of the substrate is within an acceptable limit, if the barrier layer and/or the seed layer have an acceptable thickness, etc.). If the substrate is not acceptable, instep 881, themodule controller 120 marks the substrate as defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 882; otherwise followingstep 880, theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 882. - In
step 882, themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have not been processed, theprocess 800 returns to step 869 to obtain another substrate from the cassette to process as described previously; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds to step 883. - Following deposition of a barrier layer and a seed layer on all non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette, in
step 883 the substrate cassette is transferred from the barrier/seedlayer deposition tool 112 to the electroplating tool 114 (e.g., via a technician, an automated guided vehicle, an overhead carrier system, etc.). The substrate cassette then is loaded into thefactory interface 604 of theelectroplating tool 114. Instep 884, a non-defective substrate is obtained from the substrate cassette (e.g., via thesubstrate handler 620 or 622) and, instep 885, the substrate is transferred to one of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d (e.g., via thesubstrate handler 608 after being oriented with the orienter 624). - The
module controller 120 determines an electroplating process to perform on the substrate based on information obtained from theintegrated inspection system 524 of the barrier/seed layer deposition tool 112 (or another tool such as the etch tool 106) and/or based on information obtained from theintegrated inspection system electroplating tool 114 for a substrate previously processed within one of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d. For example, whenstep 870 is performed on a substrate,module controller 120 receives information about the density/dimensions/profile of the etched features present on the substrate and stores this information (e.g., with the data storage device 206) for the substrate. Likewise, whenstep 879 is performed on a substrate (following deposition of a barrier layer and a seed layer on the substrate) as previously described,module controller 120 receives information about the barrier layer and/or seed layer formed on the substrate (e.g., barrier layer thickness, seed layer thickness, defect density, etc.) and stores this information for the substrate. Duringstep 885, themodule controller 120 may retrieve this information for the substrate to be processed, and based on the density/dimensions/profile of the etched features present on the substrate, the thickness of the barrier layer and seed layer deposited on the substrate, and/or other feedforward information, themodule controller 120 may select the appropriate electroplating process to be performed on the substrate (e.g., a process that deposits a fill layer that adequately fills each etched feature of the substrate). Information about a previously processed substrate similarly may be employed to determine the fill layer process (e.g., information such as defect density, fill layer thickness, etc., for a previously processed substrate). - As with the barrier layer and seed layer deposition processes, the
module controller 120 may store a library of electroplating processes each of which has been optimized for a particular etched feature density, etched feature dimension, etched feature profile, barrier layer thickness, barrier layer material, seed layer thickness, seed layer material, etc. Based on feedforward information about the etched features to be electroplated, the deposited barrier layer, the deposited seed layer, and/or the like, themodule controller 120 may determine an electroplating process and/or vary process parameters of an electroplating process accordingly. Likewise, one or more process parameters of an electroplating process may be adjusted based on feedback information regarding a fill layer previously formed on a substrate (e.g., if the previously formed fill layer is too thick, too thin, has too high of a defect density or some other undesirable or non-optimized characteristic). - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for an electroplating process based on feedforward information (e.g., etched feature information, barrier layer information, seed layer information, etc.) and/or feedback information (e.g., information about a previously formed fill layer) include, for example:
- 1. plating process parameters such as flow rate, Z-height (e.g., the distance between anode and substrate), substrate rotation rate, plating current, plating voltage, immersion rotation rate (e.g., the speed with which a substrate is rotated during plating), immersion voltage (e.g., the voltage applied while the substrate is being immersed in the bath), anode amp-hr, contact ring amp-hr, time, etc.;
- 2. electrolyte/bath process parameters such as bath temperature, chemical acidity, electrolyte/bath chemistry (e.g., organic polymer additive concentrations that affect corner rounding, reduce void formation during via filling and/or reduce delamination of plated material such as leveler, enhancer and/or suppressor concentrations, other additive concentrations, etc.), flow rate, etc.; and
- 3. anneal process parameters such as temperature uniformity across each substrate, gas flow rates, anneal pressure before, during or after annealing, anneal time, etc.
- The above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining an electroplating process to perform, and may affect one or more of the following characteristics of the electroplated fill layer: thickness, sheet resistance (Rs), uniformity, reflectivity, fill properties, defect density, contamination on substrate backside, etc. FIG. 10D summarizes these process parameters.
- Once an electroplating process has been determined, in
step 885, instep 886 themodule controller 120 directs the electroplating tool 114 (via one of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d) to form a fill layer (e.g., copper) on the substrate (e.g., in accordance with the process determined in step 885). FIG. 9K illustrates thesilicon substrate 902 following formation of afill layer 934 thereon within one of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 9K, thefill layer 934 comprises approximately 1 micron of copper. Thecopper fill layer 934 may be formed by any known electroplating technique such as the interaction of a copper sulfide base solution with an H2SO4 solution. Other fill layer thicknesses and materials may be employed. Exemplary copper fill layer properties include a defect density of less than fifty 0.16 micron particles per 200 mm wafer, a resistivity of about 0.18-0.02 ohm-cm, a uniformity of about 3% and a reflectivity of greater than 100% when compared to bare silicon. Other property values may be employed. - In
step 887, the substrate is transferred from the appropriate electroplating chamber 612 a-d to theintegrated bevel cleaner 614. Themodule controller 120 then directs theintegrated bevel cleaner 614 to clean the edge of the substrate. Instep 888, the substrate is transferred to the spin rinsedryer 616, and themodule controller 120 directs the spin rinsedryer 616 to clean/rinse/dry the substrate. - In
step 889, the substrate is transferred to one of theanneal chambers substrate handler 608 and one of thesubstrate handlers 620, 622). Assuming the substrate is transferred to thefirst anneal chamber 627 a, themodule controller 120 directs theanneal chamber 627 a to anneal the substrate as previously described. Alternatively, substrates may be annealed in batch (e.g., within the annealing furnace 110). An exemplary annealing process may comprise an approximately 30 minute argon anneal at 350° C., although other annealing processes may be employed. - In
step 890, the substrate is inspected by theintegrated inspection system 628 of thefactory interface 604 and is returned to the substrate cassette. For example, thedefect detection tool 628 a may analyze the surface of the fill layer to determine the defect density and/or to characterize or classify defects present on the surface of the fill layer. Themetrology tool 628 b also may determine the thickness of the electroplated fill layer and/or other material parameters (e.g., film density, film quality, etc., as is known in the art). The above information is communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 891, themodule controller 120 determines whether the fill layer formed on the substrate is acceptable (e.g., has the proper thickness, the proper material characteristics, a low enough defect density, etc.). If the fill layer is not acceptable, instep 892 the substrate is marked as defective and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 893; otherwise theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 893 fromstep 891. - In
step 893, themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates in the substrate cassette have been processed. If so, theprocess 800 proceeds to step 894; otherwise theprocess 800 returns to step 884 to obtain another non-defective substrate from the substrate cassette for processing within theelectroplating tool 114 as previously described. - In
step 894, the substrate cassette is transferred from theelectroplating tool 114 to theplanarization tool 116. Instep 895, the substrate cassette is loaded into thefactory interface 904 of theplanarization tool 116 of FIG. 7A. The substrate cassette alternatively may be transferred to theplanarization tool 116′ of FIG. 7B, wherein a process similar to that described below may be performed. - In
step 896, a non-defective substrate is obtained from the substrate cassette, and, instep 897, the substrate is transferred to theload cup 716 of the polishing system 712 (e.g., via thesubstrate handler 724 and therobot 706 as previously described). Themodule controller 120 then determines a planarization process to perform within theplanarization tool 116 based on information obtained from theintegrated inspection system electroplating tool 114 for the substrate and/or based on information obtained from theintegrated inspection system 728 of theplanarization tool 116 for a substrate previously processed within theplanarization tool 116. For example, based on information previously received from theintegrated inspection system electroplating tool 114 for the substrate to be planarized, themodule controller 120 may determine the actual thickness of the fill layer deposited on the substrate via theelectroplating tool 114 and may determine an appropriate planarization process based thereon (e.g., an appropriate planarization time). Likewise, based on a planarization process previously performed within theplanarization tool 116, themodule controller 120 may determine a planarization process. - As with other processes described herein, the
module controller 120 may store a library of planarization processes each of which has been optimized for a particular substrate condition (e.g., a particular fill layer thickness or material, a particular polish stop layer, etc.). Based on feedforward information about the fill layer formed on a substrate, other feedforward information, feedback information about a substrate previously processed within theplanarization tool 116, or other feedback information, themodule controller 120 may select one of the stored planarization processes and/or adjust the process parameters of a planarization process to achieve a desired planarization result. - Exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted for a planarization process include, for example, retaining ring pressure, membrane and/or inner tube pressure, head pressure, other parameters that affect polish uniformity, slurry or rinsing fluid flow rate, slurry type, slurry concentration, head velocity, substrate rotation rate, polish time, rinse time, various cleaning parameters such as scrub time, spin-rinse-dry time, megasonic cleaning time, etc. Adjusting one or more of these process parameters may affect one or more of polish rate, surface profile, surface uniformity, etc. The above process parameters may be adjusted alone or in combination when determining a planarization process to perform. FIG. 10E summarizes these process parameters.
- Once a planarization process has been determined, in
step 898, themodule controller 120 directs theplanarization tool 116 to planarize the substrate based on the process determined instep 897. The substrate also may be cleaned within thecleaning system 714 as previously described. - FIG. 9L illustrates the
substrate 902 following planarization within theplanarization tool 116. As shown in FIG. 9L, following planarization thebarrier layer 930, theseed layer 932 and thefill layer 934 form a substantially smooth top surface (withcopper features 934 a-b). In at least one embodiment thebarrier layer 930 is used as a polished stop layer. Thebarrier layer 930 thereafter may be removed to form the structure shown in FIG. 9L. In at least one embodiment, following polishing the substrate's top (polished) surface has less than about 700 angstroms of dishing in regions with copper, and less than about 500 angstroms of erosion in non-copper regions, has a defect density of less than about seventy-five 0.25 micron sized particles per 200 mm wafer, and has a uniformity variation that is less than about 3%. Other polished surface properties may be employed. - In
step 899, the planarized substrate is transferred to theintegrated inspection system 728 of theplanarization tool 116, is inspected and is returned to the substrate cassette. For example, the substrate may be inspected within thedefect detection tool 730 a and/or themetrology tool 730 b to determine such information as defect density, surface uniformity, etc., and this information may be communicated to themodule controller 120. - In
step 900, themodule controller 120 determines if the planarized substrate is acceptable (e.g., has a low enough defect density, has sufficient surface smoothness/planarity, that all fill layer material to be removed has been removed, etc.). If the planarized substrate is not acceptable, the substrate is marked as defective instep 901 and theprocess 800 proceeds to step 902; otherwise if the planarized substrate is acceptable theprocess 800 proceeds directly to step 902. - In
step 902 themodule controller 120 determines if all non-defective substrates within the substrate cassette have been planarized. If so, theprocess 800 ends instep 903; otherwise theprocess 800 returns to step 896 to obtain another non-defective substrate from the substrate cassette and to planarize the substrate within theplanarization tool 116 as described previously. - It will be understood that the
process 800 is merely exemplary of one low K dielectric interconnect formation process that may be performed within theinventive system 100 of FIGS. 1A and 1B. Other low K dielectric interconnect formation processes also may be performed by thesystem 100. While inprocess 800 every substrate processed is inspected following low K dielectric deposition, etching, lithography, barrier/seed layer deposition, electroplating and planarization, it will be understood that fewer than every substrate may be inspected following these steps. Further, the material layers, material layer thicknesses and other material layer properties described herein are merely exemplary and other suitable materials and material layer properties may be similarly employed. Other process conditions may be employed than those described herein. - Numerous other process steps also may be employed such as (1) post CMP stand-alone substrate inspection to determine defect density, planarity, etc., such as via the SEM 7830SI critical dimension scanning electron microscope (CD-SEM) or the WF736 DUO defect detection system both manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc.; (2) post CMP annealing for degas purposes such as within the
annealing furnace 110; (3) post CMP electrical testing (e.g., to determine device performance); and/or (4) post testing cleaning (e.g., within one or more conventional cleaning tools). - The EMC's102 a-116 a and/or the
APC modules 102 b-116 b may contain computer program code and/or data structures for performing one or more of the steps ofprocess 800 rather than or in addition to themodule controller 120. Theprogram 208 also may contain computer program code and/or data structures for performing one or more of the steps ofprocess 800. - To further aid in understanding the operation of the
invention system 100 of FIGS. 1A-B, several examples of the use of feedforward information to affect device fabrication are provided below with reference to FIGS. 11-14C. It will be understood that these are representative examples, and that other operations may be performed within thesystem 100. Each of these examples may be performed via one or more steps of theprocess 800 of FIGS. 8A-P or via one or more similar processes and may be implemented within one or more computer program products. - FIG. 11 is a cross sectional view of a
substrate 1102 having a T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104 formed over aT1 structure 1106. Apatterned masking layer 1108 havingfeatures 1108 a-d is formed over the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104 so as to define etchable regions therein. For proper device fabrication, it is important not to under etch the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 (e.g., so as to avoid forming an open circuit) or over etch the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104 (e.g., so as to avoid damaging any etch stop (not shown) disposed below the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104 and/or the T1 structure 1106). - In accordance with an aspect of the invention, following formation of the T2 low
K dielectric layer 1104 within one or more of the low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a-318 b of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102, the thickness of the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104 may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system 330 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102; and (2) fed forward to the etch tool 106 (e.g., via the module controller 120). This feedforward thickness information may be used by theetch tool 106 to control, among other things, etch time (e.g., to avoid over or under etching the T2 low K dielectric layer 1104). - During formation of line/trench features (e.g., features920 d-e in FIG. 9G) in the T2 low
K dielectric layer 1104, an optical rate monitor such as an integrated rate monitor (iRM) manufactured by Applied Materials, Inc. or a similar device may be used to monitor etch depth within the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104. Because line/trench depth impacts sheet resistance, accurate control of line/trench depth is important during device fabrication. In accordance with the present invention, theintegrated inspection system 330 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102 may measure the index of refraction of the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104 and feedforward this information to theetch tool 106. Thereafter, during formation of line/trench features within the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1104, the feedforward index of refraction information may be employed by an optical rate monitor associated with theetch tool 106 to achieve accurate depth control of the such features. - FIG. 12A is a cross sectional view of a
substrate 1202 having a T2 lowK dielectric layer 1204 formed over aT1 structure 1206. Trench features 1204 a-g are formed within the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1204 and are filled with ametal fill layer 1208. In the example of FIG. 12A, the trench depth across thesubstrate 1202 is non-uniform. That is, the trench depth is greater in the center of the substrate such thattrenches trench 1204 d is the deepest trench (as shown). - In accordance with an aspect of the invention, following formation of the
trenches 1204 a-g in the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1204 within one or more of the etch chambers 412 a-d of theetch tool 106, the depth of thetrenches 1204 a-g may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system 422 of theetch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120). This feedforward information may be used by theplanarization tool 116 to control, among other things, the amount of material removed from the center of thesubstrate 1202 relative to the edges of the substrate 1202 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the center of the substrate 1202). A more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 12B. - FIG. 13A is a cross sectional view of a
substrate 1302 having a T2 lowK dielectric layer 1304 formed over aT1 structure 1306. Trench features 1304 a-g are formed within the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1304. In the example of FIG. 13A, the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1304 is non-uniform in thickness (e.g., is “edge thick”). - In accordance with an aspect of the invention, following formation of the T2 low
K dielectric layer 1304 within one or more of the low K dielectric deposition chambers 314 a-318 b of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102, the thickness uniformity of the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1304 may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system 330 of the low Kdielectric deposition tool 102; and (2) fed forward to the etch tool 106 (e.g., via the module controller 120). Based on this feedforward information, theetch tool 106 may control formation of thetrenches 1304 a-g so that the base of each trench has a similar height above the T1 structure 1306 (e.g., so that the trenches on the edge of thesubstrate 1302 are deeper than in the center of thesubstrate 1302 as shown). This may be performed, for example, by controlling (etch chamber magnetron) magnetic field strength which is known to change the etch rate ratio of the center of a substrate to the edge of the substrate (e.g., so as to increase the etch rate toward the edge of the substrate 1302). Following trench etching, the depth and/or depth uniformity of thetrenches 1304 a-g may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system 422 of theetch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120). This feedforward information may be used by theplanarization tool 116 to control, among other things, the amount of material removed from the center of thesubstrate 1302 relative to the edges of the substrate 1302 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the edges of the substrate 1302). A more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 13B. - FIG. 14A is a cross sectional view of a
substrate 1402 having a T2 lowK dielectric layer 1404 formed over aT1 structure 1406. Trench features 1404 a-g are formed within the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1404 and are filled with ametal fill layer 1408. In the example of FIG. 14A, the trench depth across the substrate is non-uniform. That is, the trench depth is center deep such thattrenches trench 1404 d is the deepest trench (as shown). Themetal fill layer 1408 is center thick (as shown). - In accordance with an aspect of the invention, following formation of the
trenches 1404 a-g in the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1404 within one or more of the etch chambers 412 a-d of theetch tool 106, the depth uniformity of thetrenches 1404 a-g may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system 422 of theetch tool 106 or by another inspection system; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120). Likewise, following formation of themetal fill layer 1408 within one or more of the electroplating chambers 612 a-d of theelectroplating tool 114, the thickness uniformity of themetal fill layer 1408 may be (1) measured by theintegrated inspection system electroplating tool 114; and (2) fed forward to the planarization tool 116 (e.g., via the module controller 120). During a first step of a planarization process, theplanarization tool 116 may employ metal fill layer uniformity information to achieve a uniform metal fill layer such as is shown in FIG. 14B (e.g., by adjusting carrier head pressure to remove more metal from the center of thesubstrate 1402 than from its edges). During a second step of the planarization process, theplanarization tool 116 may use trench depth uniformity information to control, among other things, the amount of the T2 lowK dielectric layer 1404 removed from the center of thesubstrate 1402 relative to the edges of the substrate 1402 (e.g., by controlling carrier head pressure during polishing to remove more material from the center of the substrate 1402). A more uniform trench depth thereby may be achieved as shown in FIG. 14C. A similar process may be performed if an edge thick T2 low K dielectric layer (FIG. 13A) and a center thick metal fill layer (FIG. 14A) are deposited on a substrate. Other similar processes may be used to address any combination of center thick and/or center thin layers or trench depths. - The foregoing description discloses only exemplary embodiments of the invention. Modifications of the above disclosed apparatus and method which fall within the scope of the invention will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. For instance, other processes than those described herein may be employed during low K dielectric layer, barrier layer, seed layer or fill layer formation, etching, lithography, cleaning, annealing and/or planarization. Other processing tools than those described herein may be similarly configured with integrated inspection systems. During substrate inspection, all or a portion of each substrate may be inspected (e.g., a pre-programmed or predetermined part of a wafer die, 5-10 wafer die, etc.). Separate tools for depositing barrier layers and seed layers may be employed. While FIGS.10A-E illustrate exemplary process parameters that may be adjusted based on feedforward and feedback information, it will be understood that numerous other process parameters similarly may be adjusted. For example, if a defect density following a process is too high within a certain tool, the
module controller 120 and/or one of the EMC's 102 a-116 a may perform a cleaning process within the tool, or direct an increase in the season time used following tool maintenance so as to reduce defect density. - The
module controller 120 and/or the EMC's 102 a-116 a may be employed to monitor tool health. For example, a software diagnostic tool such as SmartSys™ which monitors equipment signals (e.g., signals from mass flow controllers, throttle valves, radio frequency sources, etc.) and analyzes such signals for drift may be used in conjunction with themodule controllers 120, and/or 102 a-116 a by having the module controllers providing other process drift information to the software diagnostic tool, or by having the module controllers adjust process parameters to compensate for process drift (e.g., by increasing process time, flow rates, chamber pressure, etc.). - Process parameters of a lithography process, such as aspects of one or more patterned masking layer formation processes, may be adjusted based on feedback information other than feedback information about a patterned masking layer formed by a given lithography process. For example, the module controller120 (FIG. 1A) (or some other module controller) may adjust one or more parameters of a lithography process to affect future patterned masking layer formation based at least in part on feedback information about etched features formed by an etch process. Adjustable process parameters of the lithography tool 104 (FIG. 1A) may include, for example, soft/hard bake times, dose of a lithographic process, exposure time and/or other exposure settings, development time, masking layer deposition time, spin rates, stepper focus, etc.
- In one exemplary embodiment of the invention, a feature, such as an etch mask, is formed on a substrate at the lithography tool104 (e.g., at a photo cell of the lithography tool 104). Measurements of the critical dimension (CD) and/or CD profile or other parameters of the feature then are measured using an integrated inspection tool (e.g., an in-line optical critical dimension (OCD) measurement unit). The measured CD information is linked via a module controller (e.g., module controller 120) to adjustable parameters of an etch process of the
etch tool 106, such as etch recipes having different etch chemistries, over-etch properties, etc. If the measured CD information deviates from a desired value, an etch recipe that corrects for the deviation may be fed forward to the etch tool (e.g., and implemented automatically) via the module controller. - Following the etch process, the substrate may be inspected again with an integrated inspection tool (e.g., an in-line OCD unit) and information regarding the substrate may be fed back to a lithography process (e.g., via a module controller). For example, post etch measurement information may be employed by a module controller to affect stepper focus and/or exposure settings for CD uniformity control. Likewise, such information may be employed by the module controller to affect etch process adjustable parameters (e.g., selection of etch recipes for etch depth uniformity). Information regarding photoresist application, exposure and/or development may be employed to affect the lithography process of a subsequent substrate (e.g., by varying stepper focus, exposure settings, etc.). Stepper focus, exposure settings, etc., may be corrected automatically to correct for undesirable process deviations. Substrate-to-substrate and within-substrate CD and trench depth control thereby may be improved.
- Process parameters of a planarization process may be adjusted based on feedforward information other than feedforward information about etched features formed by an etch process, and based on other than feedforward information about metal layers formed by an electroplating process. For example, the module controller120 (FIG. 1A) (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedforward information about a substrate processed within the dielectric deposition subsystem (e.g., deposition tool 102), one or more parameters of the planarization process to affect the planarization of a metal layer on that substrate. Such feedforward information may include, for example, a low-k deposition profile, dielectric layer thickness, etc. For example, if a low-k dielectric deposition process deposits material faster in a center of a substrate than along the edges of the substrate (e.g., a “center-fast” deposition process which produces a center-fast deposition profile), information regarding low-k dielectric layer non-uniformity may be fed forward (via a module controller) to a planarization process so as to affect the process (e.g., to compensate for the center-fast deposition profile by performing a center-fast planarization process or other suitable planarization process to compensate for actual deposited dielectric layer properties). That is, a planarization process (or processes) for the planarization subsystem (e.g., planarization tool 116), may be determined based at least in part on the dielectric deposition layer information for a substrate. One or more processing parameters of the planarization process may accordingly be affected. One result of affecting the planarization process with feedforward dielectric deposition layer information for a particular substrate may be improved uniformity in post-planarization metal layer thickness within the substrate, which in turn may yield, for example, improved uniformity in metal layer sheet resistance.
- Process parameters of an etch process for a substrate also may be adjusted at least in part based on feedforward information regarding a center-fast deposition profile for the substrate. For example, an etch process that etches faster along a center region of a substrate relative to an edge region of the substrate (e.g., a center-fast etch process) may be employed. One result of affecting the etch process with feed forward center-fast deposition profile information may be the achievement of greater etch depth consistency, which in turn may yield improved via chain resistance distribution, and/or improved via chain yield, and/or improvements related to level-to-level capacitance. Information regarding any type of dielectric layer including, for example, one or more etch stop layers, or one or more DARC layers, may be used as feedforward information.
- In one exemplary embodiment of the invention, dielectric film thickness for a substrate is fed forward to a module controller so as to affect an etch process. A specific etch recipe, a specific etch time, etc., may be affected so as to create a substrate uniformity profile that achieves a consistent etch profile across the substrate based on the dielectric film thickness information. For example, if a center-fast thickness profile is measured for a layer deposited on a substrate (e.g., via the deposition tool102), a module controller may employ a corresponding center-fast etch recipe during subsequent etching to achieve uniform etch depth across the substrate. A consistent via open may be achieved for a dual damascene via etch; and via chain resistance distribution and via chain yield may be improved. Such a control loop may be employed with all layers of a dual damascene dielectric stack such as etch stop, interlayer dielectric and low K dielectric layers.
- The module controller120 (FIG. 1A) (or some other module controller) may adjust, based on feedforward information regarding a center-fast etch profile for a substrate, one or more parameters of a planarization process to affect the planarization of a metal layer on the substrate. A planarization process (or processes) for a planarization subsystem, such as a center-fast planarization process, may be determined at least in part based on the center-fast etch profile information for the substrate. One or more processing parameters of the planarization process may accordingly be affected. One result of determining a center-fast planarization process based at least in part on a feedforward center-fast etch profile may be improved uniformity in post-planarization metal layer thickness for a dual damascene trench. Another result may be the elimination of a middle stop layer, as well as the deletion of such processing steps as are necessary to form a middle stop layer.
- In at least one embodiment of the invention, profile information regarding a deposited layer is fed forward from the deposition tool102 (via a module controller) to both the
etch tool 106 and theplanarization tool 116. In response thereto, a specific etch recipe that creates a similar or otherwise complimentary profile may be used to achieve uniform etch depths; and a specific planarization recipe that creates a similar or otherwise complimentary profile may be used to achieve metal thickness uniformity despite deposited layer uniformity variations. For example, if a center fast deposition profile is measured for a substrate (e.g., via an integrated inspection system of the deposition tool 102) and provided to themodule controller 120, a corresponding center-fast etch recipe may be employed at theetch tool 106 to ensure etch depth uniformity across the substrate. Level-to-level capacitance thereby may be improved. As stated, dielectric thickness profile information also may be fed forward to theplanarization tool 116 so that a similar corrective planarization process may be employed. Complete substrate-to-substrate and within-substrate optimization of both metal resistance and level-to-level capacitance (e.g., for M2 metal layers) may be achieved. - Additionally (or alternatively), metal layer sheet resistance (e.g., for an M2 layer) may be improved by a control loop from the
etch tool 106 to the planarization tool 116 (with or without information regarding deposited layer thickness). For example, by feeding forward etch depth profile information from the etch tool 106 (as measured by an integrated inspection system of theetch tool 106, such as an OCD system), a specific polishing recipe that creates a similar profile can be used to achieve a desired metal thickness uniformity. (In one embodiment, such a system may be used to form a dual damascene trench without a middle stop layer). For instance, if a center-fast etch profile is received by themodule controller 120, a corresponding center-fast planarization recipe may be employed to achieve the same remaining metal (e.g., copper) thickness across a substrate (as well as across subsequently planarized substrates). Consistency in metal thickness yields minimum variations of metal sheet resistance. - In one particular embodiment, a “deposition-etch module” may be formed that includes a deposition tool coupled to an etch tool via a module controller (e.g., the module controller120). For example, the deposition tool may include a Producer® system available from Applied Materials, Inc. configured with an integrated reflectometer (e.g., a Nanometrics Nano9000 or similar reflectometer). The etch tool may include, for example, an eMax™ plasma etch system available from Applied Materials, Inc. configured with an integrated rate monitor (iRM), described below, and an OCD. Other systems may be employed. The module controller may include a model-based process control system that uses run-to-run control to automatically adjust a recipe for a given substrate based on process modeling and data from previously processed substrates. The deposition-etch module may be a stand-alone module or part of the
system 100 for forming low k dielectric interconnects (FIG. 1A and/or FIG. 1B). - Such a system has been shown to produce a reduction in process variations during the fabrication of 130 nanometer and below Cu/Low K devices. For example, in one experiment, a 0.13 micron triple level metal (TLM) dual damascene process flow was used for device fabrication.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a two level metal Cu/Low K interconnect1501 formed using the above-described deposition-etch module. With reference to FIG. 15, the interconnect 1501 includes a first metal (M1)
layer 1503 fabricated using a single damascene process (forming filled trenches within a first low k interlayer dielectric 1505). The first lowk interlayer dielectric 1505 was formed over a firstetch stop layer 1507, such as silicon nitride, (formed over a pre-metal dielectric (PMD), undoped silicon glass (USG) layer 1509).First vias 1511 and a second metal (M2)layer 1513 were fabricated together using “via first” dual damascene integration (within a second low k interlayer dielectric 1515 formed over a second etch stop layer 1517). Apad metal connection 1519 was formed over thesecond metal layer 1513 which includes a thirdetch stop layer 1521, an undoped siliconglass interlayer dielectric 1523,metal lines 1525 andpad metal 1527 as shown. An Applied Materials' Producer® CVD system was used to deposit the lowk dielectric layers 1505, 1509 (e.g., fluorinated silicon glass (FSG) or Black Diamonds). An ASML 5500/90 248 deep UV stepper (0.5 NA) was employed to define patterns for both via and trench etch using an Applied Materials' TLM Back End of Line test mask. An Applied Materials' eMax™ etcher was used for both via and trench patterning. - In the above embodiment of a deposition-etch module, the module controller continuously collects process information and uses this data to optimize the deposition and/or etch tool processes using feedback or feedforward control loops (or stops a tool if too large of an excursion occurs). The module controller is a model-based process control system that uses run-to-run control to automatically adjust the recipe for given substrate based on process modeling and data from previously processed substrates. In one embodiment, to develop a model, a design of experiment (DOE) with up to a 10% process window may be employed. Data collected from the DOE may be used to construct a model and validated against run results. Once a process model is developed, it may be used to predict an optimal combination of manipulated input variables to achieve a target output (of a processing tool). Optimized variables may be incorporated into tool recipe management. For example, if a measured output result does not match a predicted value, feedback information may be employed to correct subsequent substrate processing. If process mean output exceeds a process control limit, a warning may be issued and/or the deposition/etch module may shut down to prevent substrate scrap.
- Use of closed-loop (CL) feedback (e.g., through the module controller) to control dielectric deposition resulted in a significantly lower substrate-to-substrate deposition layer thickness variation and a higher Cpk value when compared to conventional open-loop (OL) operation without feedback using a fixed time deposition. A higher Cpk value indicates less deviation from substrate-to-substrate and deposited film thicknesses that are closer to the target thickness. For via etching, during closed loop operation, the via etch process was controlled using V1 dielectric thickness data. That is, low k film thickness was fed forward to the etch tool so that etch time was optimized for each substrate. Substrate-to-substrate variation was greatly reduced through use of the feedforward data (closed loop) when compared to a fixed time etch (open loop). Such via etch repeatability may enable a reduction in the required selectivity for the etch stop layer. Alternatively, etch stop layer thickness may be reduced, lowering the effective k value of the dielectric film stack.
- The deposition/etch process module also may provide trench etch endpoint monitor/control capability (e.g., such as for a second level (T2) trench of a dual damascene interconnect). For example, an integrated etch rate monitor, iRM, such as that described in Z. Sui et al., “Integrated process control using an in-situ sensor for etch,” Solid State Technology, April 2002, may be employed for in-situ monitoring of a trench etch process to achieve consistent trench etch depth (e.g., by monitoring interferometric fringes at about 214 nanometers to determine target etch depth). Other rate monitors may be employed. Using an iRM, any etch rate changes due to incoming film properties and/or etch chamber conditions may be captured and provided to the module controller in real time. The module controller then may adjust the etch process accordingly (e.g., in real time). A higher Cpk value of removed film thickness was demonstrated on blanket substrates through feedback control using an iRM during etch processing with the etch tool. Table 1.0 illustrates exemplary standard deviation (Stdev) and Cpk values for (1) a deposition with and without feedback; (2) a via etch with and without feedforward of deposited layer thickness information to an etch tool; and (3) a T2 trench etch with and without feedback (e.g., from in-situ monitoring).
TABLE 1.0 PROCESS STEP STDEV CPK DEPOSITION WITH FEEDBACK (CL) 0.70 2.15 DEPOSITION WITH FIXED TIME (OL) 1.36 0.79 VIA ETCH WITH FEEDFORWARD (CL) 0.75 2.21 VIA ETCH WITH FIXED TIME (OL) 3.68 0.42 T2 ETCH WITH FEEDBACK (CL) 0.79 1.86 T2 ETCH WITH FIXED TIME (OL) 0.96 0.87 - Patterned device substrates with various deposition-etch splits were used to test the impacts of process perturbations and feedback control on device electrical performance. For V1 dielectric depositions, film thickness was intentionally varied from the target thickness by approximately ±5%. For via etch, some substrates were etched with dielectric thickness feeding forward to the etch tool and some without such feedforward information. For M2 trench etch, substrates were split into timed etch and etch with feedback control using an iRM. Table 2.0 summarizes the results of such closed loop and open loop operation.
TABLE 2.0 CLOSED PARAMETER OPEN LOOP LOOP LEVEL-TO-LEVEL CAPACITANCE 7.3% (1σ) 1.9% (1σ) SHORT VIA CHAIN RESISTANCE 2.9% (1σ) 1.8% (1σ) M2 SHEET RESISTANCE 4.2% (1σ) 2.2% (1σ) - Level-to-level capacitance was found to be mainly affected by via dielectric thickness, assuming a relative consistency in M2 trench etch. The substrate-to-substrate variation of parallel capacitance was reduced from about 7.3% for DOE substrates to about 1.9% using feedback control. Substrate-to-substrate variation of via resistance for process module controlled substrates was significantly less than for time-etched substrates (e.g., about 1.82% versus about 2.94%) when V1 dielectric (FSG) thickness was about 300-400 angstroms thicker than a target thickness. Average resistance of the short via chain was reduced slightly (about 2.64%) by a combination of feedback and feedforward controls. An approximately 5% improvement was observed on long via chain yields (for 100,000 vias and 4 million vias) through use of feedforward and feedback controls. M2 sheet resistances was reduced from about 4.2% (when a timed etch was employed) to about 2.2% (when feedback control was employed).
- Accordingly, while the present invention has been disclosed in connection with exemplary embodiments thereof, it should be understood that other embodiments may fall within the spirit and scope of the invention, as defined by the following claims.
Claims (2)
1. A system configured to pattern a substrate comprising:
a lithography subsystem configured to form a patterned masking layer on the substrate;
an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after the patterned masking layer has been formed thereon and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and
a controller coupled to the lithography subsystem and the etch subsystem, the controller having computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of:
receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and
adjusting a stepper focus of the lithography subsystem during formation of a subsequent patterned masking layer based at least in part on the information received from the etch subsystem.
2. A system configured to pattern a substrate comprising:
a low K dielectric deposition subsystem configured to deposit one or more low K dielectric layers on the substrate, the low K dielectric deposition subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate;
an etch subsystem configured to receive the substrate after one or more low K dielectric layers have been deposited on the substrate and to etch the substrate to form one or more etched features in the one or more low K dielectric layers formed on the substrate, the etch subsystem having an integrated inspection system configured to inspect the substrate; and
a controller coupled to the low K dielectric deposition subsystem and the etch subsystem, the controller having computer program code configured to communicate with each subsystem and to perform the steps of:
receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem;
determining an etch process to perform within the etch subsystem based at least in part on the information received from the inspection system of the low K dielectric deposition subsystem;
directing the etch subsystem to etch at least one low K dielectric layer on the substrate based on the etch process;
receiving information about the substrate from the integrated inspection system of the etch subsystem; and
adjusting etching of the substrate in real-time based on the information received from the etch subsystem.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/759,801 US20040206621A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2004-01-16 | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US38783502P | 2002-06-11 | 2002-06-11 | |
US44089803P | 2003-01-16 | 2003-01-16 | |
US10/459,194 US20040007325A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2003-06-11 | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
US10/759,801 US20040206621A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2004-01-16 | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/459,194 Continuation-In-Part US20040007325A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2003-06-11 | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20040206621A1 true US20040206621A1 (en) | 2004-10-21 |
Family
ID=33162929
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/759,801 Abandoned US20040206621A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2004-01-16 | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20040206621A1 (en) |
Cited By (21)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6881677B1 (en) * | 2004-03-17 | 2005-04-19 | Lexmark International, Inc. | Method for making a micro-fluid ejection device |
US20050196971A1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2005-09-08 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Hardware development to reduce bevel deposition |
US20060048891A1 (en) * | 2002-10-31 | 2006-03-09 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Method and apparatus for determining an etch property using an endpoint signal |
US20060246683A1 (en) * | 2002-06-11 | 2006-11-02 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
US20060249370A1 (en) * | 2003-09-15 | 2006-11-09 | Makoto Nagashima | Back-biased face target sputtering based liquid crystal display device |
US20070141748A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2007-06-21 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Extended mainframe designs for semiconductor device manufacturing equipment |
US20070205096A1 (en) * | 2006-03-06 | 2007-09-06 | Makoto Nagashima | Magnetron based wafer processing |
US20080264774A1 (en) * | 2007-04-25 | 2008-10-30 | Semitool, Inc. | Method for electrochemically depositing metal onto a microelectronic workpiece |
US20090200161A1 (en) * | 2007-11-06 | 2009-08-13 | Hui-Shen Shih | Fluid-confining apparatus and method of operating the same |
US20100093115A1 (en) * | 2006-03-28 | 2010-04-15 | Lam Research Corporation | Etch tool process indicator method and apparatus |
US20110294234A1 (en) * | 2010-05-31 | 2011-12-01 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Thin film solar fabrication process, etching method, device for etching, and thin film solar device |
US20120249990A1 (en) * | 2011-03-29 | 2012-10-04 | Kazuhiro Nishimura | Substrate processing apparatus |
US8454810B2 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2013-06-04 | 4D-S Pty Ltd. | Dual hexagonal shaped plasma source |
US9018108B2 (en) | 2013-01-25 | 2015-04-28 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Low shrinkage dielectric films |
US20150371913A1 (en) * | 2014-06-23 | 2015-12-24 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Inductive monitoring of conductive trench depth |
US20160111296A1 (en) * | 2014-10-17 | 2016-04-21 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Substrate processing apparatus, linked processing system, and substrate processing method |
US9666461B1 (en) * | 2016-02-05 | 2017-05-30 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor process and semiconductor processing device using the same |
US10350723B2 (en) | 2016-09-16 | 2019-07-16 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Overpolishing based on electromagnetic inductive monitoring of trench depth |
US20210072731A1 (en) * | 2017-12-19 | 2021-03-11 | Aixtron Se | Device and method for obtaining information about layers deposited in a cvd method |
CN115224186A (en) * | 2022-07-25 | 2022-10-21 | 复旦大学 | Josephson junction preparation device and method and josephson junction |
US20230061361A1 (en) * | 2020-01-31 | 2023-03-02 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Planarization apparatus, planarization process, and method of manufacturing an article |
Citations (46)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3156073A (en) * | 1963-01-15 | 1964-11-10 | Ray H Strasbaugh | Irregular, non-repetitive, closed-loop surfacing mechanism |
US3564776A (en) * | 1969-04-16 | 1971-02-23 | Itek Corp | Optical surface generating method and apparatus |
US3603042A (en) * | 1967-09-20 | 1971-09-07 | Speedfam Corp | Polishing machine |
US3691694A (en) * | 1970-11-02 | 1972-09-19 | Ibm | Wafer polishing machine |
US3693301A (en) * | 1970-05-27 | 1972-09-26 | Anvar | Method for producing optical elements with aspherical surfaces |
US5310410A (en) * | 1990-04-06 | 1994-05-10 | Sputtered Films, Inc. | Method for processing semi-conductor wafers in a multiple vacuum and non-vacuum chamber apparatus |
US5408450A (en) * | 1988-06-23 | 1995-04-18 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Optical pickup apparatus |
US5413664A (en) * | 1990-05-09 | 1995-05-09 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Apparatus for preparing a semiconductor device, photo treatment apparatus, pattern forming apparatus and fabrication apparatus |
US5427878A (en) * | 1991-06-26 | 1995-06-27 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Semiconductor wafer processing with across-wafer critical dimension monitoring using optical endpoint detection |
US5628828A (en) * | 1994-03-04 | 1997-05-13 | Hitachi , Ltd. | Processing method and equipment for processing a semiconductor device having holder/carrier with flattened surface |
US5655110A (en) * | 1995-02-13 | 1997-08-05 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for setting and adjusting process parameters to maintain acceptable critical dimensions across each die of mass-produced semiconductor wafers |
US5657254A (en) * | 1990-08-31 | 1997-08-12 | Sci Systems, Inc. | Process gas distribution system and method with automatic transducer zero calibration |
US5820679A (en) * | 1993-07-15 | 1998-10-13 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Fabrication system and method having inter-apparatus transporter |
US5866437A (en) * | 1997-12-05 | 1999-02-02 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Dynamic process window control using simulated wet data from current and previous layer data |
US5917919A (en) * | 1995-12-04 | 1999-06-29 | Rosenthal; Felix | Method and apparatus for multi-channel active control of noise or vibration or of multi-channel separation of a signal from a noisy environment |
US5926690A (en) * | 1997-05-28 | 1999-07-20 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Run-to-run control process for controlling critical dimensions |
US6004706A (en) * | 1997-08-28 | 1999-12-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Etching parameter control system process |
US6027842A (en) * | 1997-08-28 | 2000-02-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Process for controlling etching parameters |
US6051113A (en) * | 1998-04-27 | 2000-04-18 | Cvc Products, Inc. | Apparatus and method for multi-target physical-vapor deposition of a multi-layer material structure using target indexing |
US6086734A (en) * | 1998-04-16 | 2000-07-11 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Thin-film depositing apparatus |
US6120641A (en) * | 1998-05-12 | 2000-09-19 | Semitool, Inc. | Process architecture and manufacturing tool sets employing hard mask patterning for use in the manufacture of one or more metallization levels on a workpiece |
US6143126A (en) * | 1998-05-12 | 2000-11-07 | Semitool, Inc. | Process and manufacturing tool architecture for use in the manufacture of one or more metallization levels on an integrated circuit |
US6148239A (en) * | 1997-12-12 | 2000-11-14 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Process control system using feed forward control threads based on material groups |
US6161054A (en) * | 1997-09-22 | 2000-12-12 | On-Line Technologies, Inc. | Cell control method and apparatus |
US6166801A (en) * | 1998-07-14 | 2000-12-26 | Nova Measuring Instruments, Ltd. | Monitoring apparatus and method particularly useful in photolithographically processing substrates |
US6197604B1 (en) * | 1998-10-01 | 2001-03-06 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for providing cooperative run-to-run control for multi-product and multi-process semiconductor fabrication |
US6208751B1 (en) * | 1998-03-24 | 2001-03-27 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Cluster tool |
US6213848B1 (en) * | 1999-08-11 | 2001-04-10 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for determining a polishing recipe based upon the measured pre-polish thickness of a process layer |
US6230069B1 (en) * | 1998-06-26 | 2001-05-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | System and method for controlling the manufacture of discrete parts in semiconductor fabrication using model predictive control |
US6245581B1 (en) * | 2000-04-19 | 2001-06-12 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for control of critical dimension using feedback etch control |
US6284622B1 (en) * | 1999-10-25 | 2001-09-04 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for filling trenches |
US6304999B1 (en) * | 2000-10-23 | 2001-10-16 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for embedded process control framework in tool systems |
US6368879B1 (en) * | 1999-09-22 | 2002-04-09 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Process control with control signal derived from metrology of a repetitive critical dimension feature of a test structure on the work piece |
US6388253B1 (en) * | 1999-06-29 | 2002-05-14 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Integrated critical dimension control for semiconductor device manufacturing |
US6405144B1 (en) * | 2000-01-18 | 2002-06-11 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for programmed latency for improving wafer-to-wafer uniformity |
US6405096B1 (en) * | 1999-08-10 | 2002-06-11 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for run-to-run controlling of overlay registration |
US6408220B1 (en) * | 1999-06-01 | 2002-06-18 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Semiconductor processing techniques |
US6438440B1 (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2002-08-20 | Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd. | Method and system for managing semiconductor manufacturing equipment |
US6445969B1 (en) * | 1997-01-27 | 2002-09-03 | Circuit Image Systems | Statistical process control integration systems and methods for monitoring manufacturing processes |
US20020155629A1 (en) * | 2000-11-20 | 2002-10-24 | Fairbairn Kevin P. | Semiconductor processing module with integrated feedback/feed forward metrology |
US6546306B1 (en) * | 1999-08-11 | 2003-04-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for adjusting incoming film thickness uniformity such that variations across the film after polishing minimized |
US6587744B1 (en) * | 1999-06-22 | 2003-07-01 | Brooks Automation, Inc. | Run-to-run controller for use in microelectronic fabrication |
US6625514B1 (en) * | 2001-05-23 | 2003-09-23 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for optical lifetime tracking of trench features |
US6698944B2 (en) * | 2000-06-15 | 2004-03-02 | Nikon Corporation | Exposure apparatus, substrate processing unit and lithographic system, and device manufacturing method |
US6863733B1 (en) * | 1999-07-15 | 2005-03-08 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus for fabricating thin-film semiconductor device |
US6960416B2 (en) * | 2002-03-01 | 2005-11-01 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling etch processes during fabrication of semiconductor devices |
-
2004
- 2004-01-16 US US10/759,801 patent/US20040206621A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (50)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3156073A (en) * | 1963-01-15 | 1964-11-10 | Ray H Strasbaugh | Irregular, non-repetitive, closed-loop surfacing mechanism |
US3603042A (en) * | 1967-09-20 | 1971-09-07 | Speedfam Corp | Polishing machine |
US3564776A (en) * | 1969-04-16 | 1971-02-23 | Itek Corp | Optical surface generating method and apparatus |
US3693301A (en) * | 1970-05-27 | 1972-09-26 | Anvar | Method for producing optical elements with aspherical surfaces |
US3691694A (en) * | 1970-11-02 | 1972-09-19 | Ibm | Wafer polishing machine |
US5408450A (en) * | 1988-06-23 | 1995-04-18 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Optical pickup apparatus |
US5310410A (en) * | 1990-04-06 | 1994-05-10 | Sputtered Films, Inc. | Method for processing semi-conductor wafers in a multiple vacuum and non-vacuum chamber apparatus |
US5413664A (en) * | 1990-05-09 | 1995-05-09 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Apparatus for preparing a semiconductor device, photo treatment apparatus, pattern forming apparatus and fabrication apparatus |
US5657254A (en) * | 1990-08-31 | 1997-08-12 | Sci Systems, Inc. | Process gas distribution system and method with automatic transducer zero calibration |
US5427878A (en) * | 1991-06-26 | 1995-06-27 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Semiconductor wafer processing with across-wafer critical dimension monitoring using optical endpoint detection |
US6099598A (en) * | 1993-07-15 | 2000-08-08 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Fabrication system and fabrication method |
US5820679A (en) * | 1993-07-15 | 1998-10-13 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Fabrication system and method having inter-apparatus transporter |
US5628828A (en) * | 1994-03-04 | 1997-05-13 | Hitachi , Ltd. | Processing method and equipment for processing a semiconductor device having holder/carrier with flattened surface |
US5655110A (en) * | 1995-02-13 | 1997-08-05 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for setting and adjusting process parameters to maintain acceptable critical dimensions across each die of mass-produced semiconductor wafers |
US5917919A (en) * | 1995-12-04 | 1999-06-29 | Rosenthal; Felix | Method and apparatus for multi-channel active control of noise or vibration or of multi-channel separation of a signal from a noisy environment |
US6445969B1 (en) * | 1997-01-27 | 2002-09-03 | Circuit Image Systems | Statistical process control integration systems and methods for monitoring manufacturing processes |
US5926690A (en) * | 1997-05-28 | 1999-07-20 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Run-to-run control process for controlling critical dimensions |
US6004706A (en) * | 1997-08-28 | 1999-12-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Etching parameter control system process |
US6027842A (en) * | 1997-08-28 | 2000-02-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Process for controlling etching parameters |
US6161054A (en) * | 1997-09-22 | 2000-12-12 | On-Line Technologies, Inc. | Cell control method and apparatus |
US5866437A (en) * | 1997-12-05 | 1999-02-02 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Dynamic process window control using simulated wet data from current and previous layer data |
US6148239A (en) * | 1997-12-12 | 2000-11-14 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Process control system using feed forward control threads based on material groups |
US6208751B1 (en) * | 1998-03-24 | 2001-03-27 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Cluster tool |
US6086734A (en) * | 1998-04-16 | 2000-07-11 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Thin-film depositing apparatus |
US6051113A (en) * | 1998-04-27 | 2000-04-18 | Cvc Products, Inc. | Apparatus and method for multi-target physical-vapor deposition of a multi-layer material structure using target indexing |
US6120641A (en) * | 1998-05-12 | 2000-09-19 | Semitool, Inc. | Process architecture and manufacturing tool sets employing hard mask patterning for use in the manufacture of one or more metallization levels on a workpiece |
US6143126A (en) * | 1998-05-12 | 2000-11-07 | Semitool, Inc. | Process and manufacturing tool architecture for use in the manufacture of one or more metallization levels on an integrated circuit |
US6230069B1 (en) * | 1998-06-26 | 2001-05-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | System and method for controlling the manufacture of discrete parts in semiconductor fabrication using model predictive control |
US6166801A (en) * | 1998-07-14 | 2000-12-26 | Nova Measuring Instruments, Ltd. | Monitoring apparatus and method particularly useful in photolithographically processing substrates |
US6438440B1 (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2002-08-20 | Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd. | Method and system for managing semiconductor manufacturing equipment |
US6197604B1 (en) * | 1998-10-01 | 2001-03-06 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for providing cooperative run-to-run control for multi-product and multi-process semiconductor fabrication |
US6408220B1 (en) * | 1999-06-01 | 2002-06-18 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Semiconductor processing techniques |
US6587744B1 (en) * | 1999-06-22 | 2003-07-01 | Brooks Automation, Inc. | Run-to-run controller for use in microelectronic fabrication |
US6486492B1 (en) * | 1999-06-29 | 2002-11-26 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Integrated critical dimension control for semiconductor device manufacturing |
US6388253B1 (en) * | 1999-06-29 | 2002-05-14 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Integrated critical dimension control for semiconductor device manufacturing |
US6863733B1 (en) * | 1999-07-15 | 2005-03-08 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus for fabricating thin-film semiconductor device |
US6405096B1 (en) * | 1999-08-10 | 2002-06-11 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for run-to-run controlling of overlay registration |
US6546306B1 (en) * | 1999-08-11 | 2003-04-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for adjusting incoming film thickness uniformity such that variations across the film after polishing minimized |
US6213848B1 (en) * | 1999-08-11 | 2001-04-10 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for determining a polishing recipe based upon the measured pre-polish thickness of a process layer |
US6368879B1 (en) * | 1999-09-22 | 2002-04-09 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Process control with control signal derived from metrology of a repetitive critical dimension feature of a test structure on the work piece |
US6454899B1 (en) * | 1999-10-25 | 2002-09-24 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Apparatus for filling trenches |
US6284622B1 (en) * | 1999-10-25 | 2001-09-04 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method for filling trenches |
US6405144B1 (en) * | 2000-01-18 | 2002-06-11 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for programmed latency for improving wafer-to-wafer uniformity |
US6245581B1 (en) * | 2000-04-19 | 2001-06-12 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for control of critical dimension using feedback etch control |
US6698944B2 (en) * | 2000-06-15 | 2004-03-02 | Nikon Corporation | Exposure apparatus, substrate processing unit and lithographic system, and device manufacturing method |
US6304999B1 (en) * | 2000-10-23 | 2001-10-16 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for embedded process control framework in tool systems |
US20020155629A1 (en) * | 2000-11-20 | 2002-10-24 | Fairbairn Kevin P. | Semiconductor processing module with integrated feedback/feed forward metrology |
US6625497B2 (en) * | 2000-11-20 | 2003-09-23 | Applied Materials Inc. | Semiconductor processing module with integrated feedback/feed forward metrology |
US6625514B1 (en) * | 2001-05-23 | 2003-09-23 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and apparatus for optical lifetime tracking of trench features |
US6960416B2 (en) * | 2002-03-01 | 2005-11-01 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling etch processes during fabrication of semiconductor devices |
Cited By (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060246683A1 (en) * | 2002-06-11 | 2006-11-02 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate |
US20060048891A1 (en) * | 2002-10-31 | 2006-03-09 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Method and apparatus for determining an etch property using an endpoint signal |
US8048326B2 (en) * | 2002-10-31 | 2011-11-01 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Method and apparatus for determining an etch property using an endpoint signal |
US20060249370A1 (en) * | 2003-09-15 | 2006-11-09 | Makoto Nagashima | Back-biased face target sputtering based liquid crystal display device |
US20050196971A1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2005-09-08 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Hardware development to reduce bevel deposition |
US20080152838A1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2008-06-26 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Hardware development to reduce bevel deposition |
US6881677B1 (en) * | 2004-03-17 | 2005-04-19 | Lexmark International, Inc. | Method for making a micro-fluid ejection device |
US7720655B2 (en) | 2005-12-20 | 2010-05-18 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Extended mainframe designs for semiconductor device manufacturing equipment |
US20070141748A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2007-06-21 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Extended mainframe designs for semiconductor device manufacturing equipment |
US20070205096A1 (en) * | 2006-03-06 | 2007-09-06 | Makoto Nagashima | Magnetron based wafer processing |
US20100093115A1 (en) * | 2006-03-28 | 2010-04-15 | Lam Research Corporation | Etch tool process indicator method and apparatus |
US8492174B2 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2013-07-23 | Lam Research Corporation | Etch tool process indicator method and apparatus |
US8206996B2 (en) * | 2006-03-28 | 2012-06-26 | Lam Research Corporation | Etch tool process indicator method and apparatus |
US8454810B2 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2013-06-04 | 4D-S Pty Ltd. | Dual hexagonal shaped plasma source |
US20080264774A1 (en) * | 2007-04-25 | 2008-10-30 | Semitool, Inc. | Method for electrochemically depositing metal onto a microelectronic workpiece |
US20090200161A1 (en) * | 2007-11-06 | 2009-08-13 | Hui-Shen Shih | Fluid-confining apparatus and method of operating the same |
US20110294234A1 (en) * | 2010-05-31 | 2011-12-01 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Thin film solar fabrication process, etching method, device for etching, and thin film solar device |
US9494877B2 (en) * | 2011-03-29 | 2016-11-15 | Screen Semiconductor Solutions Co., Ltd. | Substrate processing apparatus |
US10216099B2 (en) | 2011-03-29 | 2019-02-26 | Screen Semiconductor Solutions Co., Ltd. | Substrate processing apparatus |
US20120249990A1 (en) * | 2011-03-29 | 2012-10-04 | Kazuhiro Nishimura | Substrate processing apparatus |
US9018108B2 (en) | 2013-01-25 | 2015-04-28 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Low shrinkage dielectric films |
US9754846B2 (en) * | 2014-06-23 | 2017-09-05 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Inductive monitoring of conductive trench depth |
US10103073B2 (en) | 2014-06-23 | 2018-10-16 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Inductive monitoring of conductive trench depth |
US20150371913A1 (en) * | 2014-06-23 | 2015-12-24 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Inductive monitoring of conductive trench depth |
US10741459B2 (en) | 2014-06-23 | 2020-08-11 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Inductive monitoring of conductive loops |
US20160111296A1 (en) * | 2014-10-17 | 2016-04-21 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Substrate processing apparatus, linked processing system, and substrate processing method |
US11784057B2 (en) | 2014-10-17 | 2023-10-10 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Substrate processing apparatus, linked processing system, and substrate processing method |
US9666461B1 (en) * | 2016-02-05 | 2017-05-30 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor process and semiconductor processing device using the same |
US10350723B2 (en) | 2016-09-16 | 2019-07-16 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Overpolishing based on electromagnetic inductive monitoring of trench depth |
US20210072731A1 (en) * | 2017-12-19 | 2021-03-11 | Aixtron Se | Device and method for obtaining information about layers deposited in a cvd method |
US11669072B2 (en) * | 2017-12-19 | 2023-06-06 | Aixtron Se | Device and method for obtaining information about layers deposited in a CVD method |
US20230061361A1 (en) * | 2020-01-31 | 2023-03-02 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Planarization apparatus, planarization process, and method of manufacturing an article |
CN115224186A (en) * | 2022-07-25 | 2022-10-21 | 复旦大学 | Josephson junction preparation device and method and josephson junction |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20060246683A1 (en) | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate | |
US20040206621A1 (en) | Integrated equipment set for forming a low K dielectric interconnect on a substrate | |
US20030220708A1 (en) | Integrated equipment set for forming shallow trench isolation regions | |
KR101124186B1 (en) | Method and apparatus employing integrated metrology for improved dielectric etch efficiency | |
US7083495B2 (en) | Advanced process control approach for Cu interconnect wiring sheet resistance control | |
US20030074098A1 (en) | Integrated equipment set for forming an interconnect on a substrate | |
US7700494B2 (en) | Low-pressure removal of photoresist and etch residue | |
US7482178B2 (en) | Chamber stability monitoring using an integrated metrology tool | |
JP2014513415A (en) | Compatibility recipe selection | |
US7368397B2 (en) | Method for monitoring edge bead removal process of copper metal interconnection | |
KR20060127115A (en) | Stress free etch processing in combination with a dynamic liquid meniscus | |
US20060088949A1 (en) | Early detection of metal wiring reliability using a noise spectrum | |
US6800494B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for controlling copper barrier/seed deposition processes | |
US7314808B2 (en) | Method for sequencing substrates | |
US12020992B2 (en) | Methods and apparatus for processing a substrate | |
US7262865B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for controlling a calibration cycle or a metrology tool | |
US6809032B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for detecting the endpoint of a chemical-mechanical polishing operation using optical techniques | |
JP2004253516A (en) | Dry etching method and apparatus for test sample | |
Schneider et al. | Integrated metrology: An enabler for advanced process control (APC) | |
US12138742B2 (en) | Methods and apparatus for processing a substrate | |
US20220258304A1 (en) | Methods and apparatus for processing a substrate | |
Biolsi et al. | An advanced endpoint solution for< 1% open area applications; contact and via | |
Hu et al. | Improving Cu line Rs control using feed-forward information for CMP endpointing |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: APPLIED MATERIALS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LI, HONGWEN (HOWARD);LUO, LEE;ILIOPOULOS, ILIAS;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:014741/0640;SIGNING DATES FROM 20040520 TO 20040601 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |